Vista 128bp V1 Installation Manual

Vista-128BP v1 Installation Manual Vista-128BP v1 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

User Manual: vista-128bp-v1-installation-manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 128 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

K5894 2/02 Rev B
9
9,
,6
67
7$
$
%
%3
3
9
9,
,6
67
7$
$
%
%3
3
&RPPHUFLDO%XUJODU\
3DUWLWLRQHG6HFXULW\6\VWHP
ZLWK6FKHGXOLQJ
,QVWDOODWLRQDQG6HWXS*XLGH
ON OFF
1
OFF
4
MAX
7
INSTANT
READY
2
AWAY
5
TEST
8
CODE
0
3
STAY
6
BYPASS
9
CHIME
#
ARMED
READY
1
OFF
4
MAX
7
INSTANT
READY
2
AWAY
5
TEST
8
CODE
0
3
STAY
6
BYPASS
9
CHIME
#
ARMED
READY
®
.
.
iii
Table of Contents
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
List of Figures...................................................................................................................................... v
Conventions Used in This Manual..................................................................................................... vi
SECTION 1: General Description..................................................................................................... 1-1
About the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP .............................................................................................................................1-1
Features.............................................................................................................................................................................1-1
SECTION 2: Partitioning and Panel Linking.................................................................................... 2-1
Theory of Partitioning.........................................................................................................................................................2-1
Setting-Up a Partitioned System........................................................................................................................................2-1
Common Lobby Logic ........................................................................................................................................................2-1
Master Keypad Setup and Operation.................................................................................................................................2-3
Panel Linking .....................................................................................................................................................................2-4
How to Use Panel Linking..................................................................................................................................................2-5
SECTION 3: Installing the Control ................................................................................................... 3-1
Mounting the Control Cabinet ............................................................................................................................................3-1
Installing the Cabinet Lock.................................................................................................................................................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines...............................................................................................................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines ......................................................................................................3-2
Installing the Control's Circuit Board..................................................................................................................................3-2
Installing the Keypads........................................................................................................................................................3-3
Installing External Sounders ..............................................................................................................................................3-4
Telephone Line Connections .............................................................................................................................................3-5
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-9 ..............................................................................................................3-6
Installing RPM Devices ......................................................................................................................................................3-9
Wireless Zone Expansion ................................................................................................................................................3-10
Installing Output Devices .................................................................................................................................................3-14
Installing the Ground Start Module...................................................................................................................................3-15
Installing a Remote Keyswitch .........................................................................................................................................3-16
Smoke Detector Reset.....................................................................................................................................................3-17
Remote Keypad Sounder.................................................................................................................................................3-17
Installing the VA8200 Panel Link Module.........................................................................................................................3-17
Long Range Radio Connected to the J7 Triggers............................................................................................................3-17
Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP ......................................................................................................................3-19
Installing the Alpha Pager Module ...................................................................................................................................3-20
Access Control Using VistaKey........................................................................................................................................3-22
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System .........................................................................................3-23
Event Log Connections....................................................................................................................................................3-23
Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module ...............................................................................................................................3-24
Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module.................................................................................................................3-25
Installing TeleSmart .........................................................................................................................................................3-26
Connecting the Transformer ............................................................................................................................................3-28
Panel Earth Ground Connections ....................................................................................................................................3-29
Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load ................................................................................................................3-29
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery ...................................................................................................................3-30
SECTION 4: Programming................................................................................................................4-1
Program Modes..................................................................................................................................................................4-1
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode...........................................................................................................................4-1
Data Field Programming Mode ..........................................................................................................................................4-1
#93 Menu Mode Programming...........................................................................................................................................4-2
Zone Number Designations ...............................................................................................................................................4-4
Zone Response Type Definitions.......................................................................................................................................4-6
Zone Input Type Definitions ...............................................................................................................................................4-7
Programming for Panel Linking..........................................................................................................................................4-8
Programming for the Alpha Pager Module.........................................................................................................................4-9
Programming for TeleSmart...............................................................................................................................................4-9
Programming for Access Control .......................................................................................................................................4-9
Programming for ECP Long Range Radio ................................................................................................... 4-10
Programming for the Event Log .......................................................................................................................................4-10
Table of Contents
iv
SECTION 5: Data Field Descriptions ............................................................................................... 5-1
About Data Field Programming..........................................................................................................................................5-1
Programming Data Fields ..................................................................................................................................................5-1
SECTION 6: Scheduling Options ..................................................................................................... 6-1
Time Window Definitions ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
Open/Close Schedules Definitions.....................................................................................................................................6-3
Scheduling Menu Mode .....................................................................................................................................................6-4
Time Windows ...................................................................................................................................................................6-5
Daily Open/Close Schedules .............................................................................................................................................6-6
Holiday Schedules .............................................................................................................................................................6-6
Time-Driven Events............................................................................................................................................................6-7
Limitation of Access Schedules .......................................................................................................................................6-11
Temporary Schedules......................................................................................................................................................6-12
User Scheduling Menu Mode...........................................................................................................................................6-14
SECTION 7: Downloading Primer.................................................................................................... 7-1
General Information ...........................................................................................................................................................7-1
Unattended Download........................................................................................................................................................7-1
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel.................................................................................................................................7-3
Scheduled Download .........................................................................................................................................................7-4
Direct-Wire Downloading ...................................................................................................................................................7-4
Telco Handoff.....................................................................................................................................................................7-4
SECTION 8: Setting the Real-Time Clock........................................................................................ 8-1
General Information ...........................................................................................................................................................8-1
Setting the Time and Date .................................................................................................................................................8-1
SECTION 9: User Access Codes...................................................................................................... 9-1
General Information ...........................................................................................................................................................9-1
User Codes & Levels of Authority ......................................................................................................................................9-1
Multiple Partition Access....................................................................................................................................................9-2
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code...................................................................................................................9-3
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code...............................................................................................................9-4
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User...............................................................................................................................9-4
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code.................................................................................................................9-4
Exiting the User Edit Mode.................................................................................................................................................9-4
SECTION 10: Testing the System ..................................................................................................10-1
Battery Test......................................................................................................................................................................10-1
Dialer Test........................................................................................................................................................................10-1
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST) ............................................................................................................................10-1
Armed Burglary System Test ...........................................................................................................................................10-1
Testing Wireless Transmitters .........................................................................................................................................10-2
Trouble Conditions...........................................................................................................................................................10-3
To the Installer .................................................................................................................................................................10-3
APPENDIX A: Regulatory Agency Statements................................................................................A-1
UL Installation Requirements............................................................................................................................................ A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault...................................................................... A-1
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm ............................................................................................................... A-1
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm ................................................................................................................ A-2
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and UL Residential Fire Battery Backup Requirements........................................A-2
APPENDIX B: Summary of System Commands..............................................................................B-1
APPENDIX C: Specifications............................................................................................................C-1
APPENDIX D: Contact ID and Pager Event Codes..........................................................................D-1
TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES........................................................................................................................D-1
Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors........................................................................................................................... D-2
Index ...........................................................................................................................................Index-1
APPENDIX E:.....................................................................................................................................E-1
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
v
List of Figures
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock..................................................................................................................................................3-1
Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations............................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board..........................................................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel...................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply..................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-6: Wiring Polarized Fire Devices................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-7: Wiring Nonpolarized Burglary Devices ..................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-8: Telephone Line Connections.................................................................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-9: Wiring Connections for Zones 1-9 .........................................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1 ......................................................................................................................3-6
Figure 3-11: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors......................................................................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-12a: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control........................................................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-12b: Wiring a 333PRM using a 4204.........................................................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-12c: Wiring a 333PRM using a 4204 and a Power Supply........................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8................................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Closed Loop for Tamper Supervision.....................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-15: Wiring a Normally Open Loop for Tamper Supervision .......................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections to the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP..........................................................................3-10
Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module...........................................................................3-10
Figure 3-18: Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple Extender Modules.............................................................................3-10
Figure 3-19: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper Protection...............................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-20: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)...................................................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-21: 4204 Relay Module............................................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-22: 4204CF Relay Module .......................................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-23: Wiring the FSA Module......................................................................................................................................3-15
Figure 3-24: Ground Start Module Connections.....................................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-25: Remote Keyswitch Wiring..................................................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-26: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring .......................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-27: Panel Linking Block Diagram.............................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-28: VA8200 Panel Link Module Wiring ....................................................................................................................3-17
Figure 3-29: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad Terminals................................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-30: Wiring the Alpha Pager Module.........................................................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-31: Wiring the VistaKey ............................................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-32: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module ...................................................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-33: Printer Connections to the 4100SM...................................................................................................................3-24
Figure 3-34: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections .................................................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-35: AAV Connections to J7 Trigger..........................................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-36: AAV Connections to 4204 Relay Module...........................................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-37: AAV and 4286 VIP Module Connections to the J7 Trigger................................................................................3-26
Figure 3-38: TeleSmart Phone Connections..........................................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-39: TeleSmart Speaker Connection..........................................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-40: Keypad Connections...........................................................................................................................................3-27
Figure 3-41: RTC and Ground Connections............................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-42: TeleSmart to Control Connections......................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-43: 1321 Transformer and Battery Connections......................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-44: 4300 Transformer Connections .........................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections..................................................................................................................7-4
VISTA-128BP Summary of Connections Diagram................................................................................................................... E-3
VISTA-250BP Summary of Connections Diagram................................................................................................................... E-4
vi
Conventions Used in This Manual
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the following
symbols (icons).
UL These notes include specific information that must be followed if you are installing this system for
a UL Listed application.
These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with the
installation, and that, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.
This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the system, or
could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully. This symbol also
denotes warnings about physical harm to the user
.
ZONE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Many system options are programmed in an interactive mode by responding to
alpha keypad display prompts. These prompts are shown in a single-line box.
00 Additional system options are programmed via data fields, which are indicated by a “star” ()
followed by the data field number.
PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS:
Unless noted otherwise, references to specific model numbers represent ADEMCO products.
1-1
SECTION 1
General Description
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
About the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP is an 8-partition, UL Listed control panel with the following features:
Up to 128 zones for VISTA-128BP; 250 zones for VISTA-250BP (hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones)
Up to 150 user codes for VISTA-128BP; 250 user codes for VISTA-250BP
Supervision of bells, keypads, RF receivers, and output devices
Scheduling capabilities (allows certain operations to be automated)
The capability to link up to 8 control panels using Panel Linking Modules
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP can interface with the following devices:
TeleSmart (See the TeleSmart instructions for operating procedures)
An alpha numeric paging device (VA8201)
Symphony (AUI)
Panel Link Module (VA8200)
An ECP Long Range Radio that can send Contact ID messages
An access control system by using either the ADEMCO PassPoint system (via the VISTA Gateway Module) or a
VistaKey module (via the polling loop)
UL The access control function is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Control Panel in a UL
installation.
The system supports either the VistaKey or the VISTA Gateway Module, not both.
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250BP’s features. The following table lists the differences
between the VISTA-128BP and the VISTA-250BP control panels. All other features are identical, except for
the Remote Keypad Sounder (field 146 option 2), which is available only in the VISTA128BP.
Feature VISTA-128BP VISTA-250BP
Number of Zones 128 250
Number of User Codes 150 250
Number of Access Cards 250 500
Event Log Capacity 512 1000
Features
Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones
Provides 9 hardwire zones.
Supports up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1.
Automatically resets 4-wire smoke detectors using the J7 output when a code + off is entered.
Triggers the built-in sounders on other hardwired smoke detectors if one smoke detector annunciates an alarm.
This feature requires a 4204 Relay Module and/or the 333PRM.
Provides tamper supervision on the hardwire zones.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
1-2
Supports up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.
Supports up to 241 additional expansion zones (119 for the VISTA-128BP) using a built-in polling (multiplex) loop.
Supports up to 250 wireless zones (128 for the VISTA-128BP) (fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones).
UL The 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial Burglary
applications. All other RF receivers and transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial Burglary applications.
Can program burglary zones as silent in the alarm condition (alarm output is silent and the keypad does not display
or sound the alarm).
Provides three keypad panic keys: 1 + (A), + # (B), and 3 + # (C).
Peripherals Devices
Supports up to 31 addressable devices, (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.).
Supervises devices (keypads, RF receivers, and relay modules) and individual relays (up to 32), as well as system
zones (RF receivers and keypad panics).
Provides 96 outputs using 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules, Fire System Annunciators (FSA-8, FSA-24), V-Plex
Relay Modules and Powerline Carrier Devices (X-10) can activate outputs in response to system events (alarm
condition), at a specific time of day, at random times, and manually using the #70 Relay Command Mode.
Supports the ADEMCO 4285/4286 VIP Module, which allows access to the system from either a remote location or
on the premises
UL The VIP Module is not Listed for use with the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Control Panel in a UL installation.
Supports the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the system's 8 partitions.
Arming/Disarming and Bypassing
Can arm the system with zones faulted (Vent Zone). These zones are automatically bypassed and can be
programmed to automatically unbypass when the zone restores.
Can arm with entry/exit and interior type zones faulted (Arm w/Fault). These zones must be restored before the exit
delay expires, otherwise an alarm is generated.
Provides global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the user code has access to in one command).
Can Quick Exit an armed premises without having to disarm and then rearm the system.
Can be armed in one of three STAY modes or Instant modes, automatically bypassing specific burglary zones
regardless of the zone response type.
Can automatically bypass specific zones if no one exits the premises after arming (Auto-STAY). Auto-STAY will not
occur if the system is armed via an RF transmitter, VIP module, scheduling, access control, keyswitch, RS232
automation or downloading.
Can bypass a group of zones with one set of keystrokes.
Supports Exit Error Logic, whereby the system can tell the difference between a regular alarm and an alarm caused
by leaving an entry/exit door open. If the system is not subsequently disarmed, faulted E/E zone(s) and/or interior
zones are bypassed and the system arms.
Supports Recent Close report, which is designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within 2
minutes after the exit delay has expired.
Partitioning and Panel Linking
Can control 8 separate areas independently, each functioning as if it had its own separate control.
Provides a Common Lobby partition, which can be programmed to arm automatically when the last partition is
armed, and to disarm when the first partition is disarmed.
Provides a Master partition (9), used for the purpose of viewing the status of all partitions at the same time.
Can display fire, burglary, panic and trouble conditions at all other partitions’ keypads (selectable option).
Can “link” together up to 8 control panels. This allows users to access and control from a keypad another control
panel.
Section 1 - General Description
1-3
Scheduling
Can automate system functions, such as arming, disarming, and activation of outputs (e.g., lights).
Provides access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time).
Provides an End User Output Programming Mode, allowing the user to control outputs.
Access Control
Supports up to 15 VistaKey modules (15 access points), which are used for access control. It is a single-door access
control module.
Support up to 500 access cards.
Supports ADEMCO PassPoint system via one VISTA Gateway Module (VGM), for a fully integrated access control
system.
Can store access control events in the event log.
System Communication
Supports ADEMCO Contact ID; ADEMCO High Speed; ADEMCO Express; and 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 ADEMCO and
Sescoa/Radionics Low-Speed formats.
The system is shipped defaulted for Contact ID communication. It is the only format capable of uniquely reporting
all 250 zones, as well as openings and closings for all 250 users. This requires central stations to be equipped with
the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software level 4.7 or higher to fully support all new VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP
report codes. If you need to update your 685 receiver, contact your distributor.
Can send messages such as alarms, opens/closes, etc. to up to 8 paging services.
Provides two paging formats (alphanumeric – requires the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module; and numeric – sent
directly by the control)
Supports Dynamic Signaling feature, which prevents redundant signals being sent to the central station when both
the built-in dialer and Long Range Radio are used.
Provides an Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) option that permits voice dialog between an operator at the central
station and a person at the premises. An AAV unit, such as Eagle model 1250, is required.
UL The Eagle Model 1250 AAV unit is not UL Listed.
Downloading
Supports upload and download capability.
Can perform unattended downloading (no one at the downloading computer).
Provides an Installer Unattended Program Mode. This allows the installer to program the download phone number,
subscriber number, and primary central station receiver phone number without entering the normal program mode.
Can periodically and automatically perform a scheduled download.
Can download access control cardholder information.
Event Log
Provides an event log (history log) that can store up to 1000 events.
Can print the event log on a parallel or serial printer using a VA8201 Alpha Pager Module.
Can view the event log on an alpha keypad or AUI.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
1-4
Additional Features
Provides up to 60 installer-defined, custom words that can be used for zone descriptors.
Provides 32 keypad macro commands (each macro is a series of keypad commands of up to 32 keystrokes) using the
A, B, C, and D keys by partition.
Provides cross-zone capability, which helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going into alarm unless
its cross-zone is also faulted within a 5-minute period.
Contains a built-in User’s Manual, which provides the end user with a brief explanation of the function of a key
when the user presses any of the function keys on the keypad for 5 seconds.
Provides trigger outputs, which may interface with Long Range Radio equipment or other devices such as keyswitch
LEDs, printer, or pager.
Provides an RS232 input for serial data. This is useful for interfacing the system with Automation software.
Automation software cannot be used if a serial printer is used on the system.
At least one 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160) must be connected to the system for programming (if you are using
keypad programming), and must remain connected to the system in order to allow the primary user to program
additional user codes into the system at a later time.
2-1
SECTION 2
Partitioning and Panel Linking
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Theory of Partitioning
This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, as if each had its own control. These areas
are called partitions. A Partitioned system allows the user to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed, or
to limit access to certain areas to specific individuals. Each system user can be assigned to operate any or all partitions,
and can be given a different authority level in each.
Before anything can be assigned to those partitions, you must first determine how many partitions (1-8) are required.
Following are some facts you need to know about partitioning.
Keypads
Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and be assigned to one partition. It can also be assigned to Partition 9 if
Master keypad operation is desired. (See “Master Keypad Setup and Operation” later in this section.)
Zones
Each zone must be assigned to one partition. The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's
keypad(s).
Users
Each user may be given access to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than one partition and would like
to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single command, the user must be enabled for Global Arming for
those partitions (when entering user codes).
A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition from another partition's
keypad, provided that program field 2*18: Enable GOTO is enabled for each partition he/she wants to log on to from
another.
A partition can be selected as a "common lobby" partition, and other partitions can affect this partition by causing
arming/disarming of this partition to be automated (see “Common Lobby Logic” later in this section).
Setting-Up a Partitioned System
The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more information on how to program
the options, see SECTION 4: Programming.
1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).
2. Assign keypads to partitions (Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
3. Assign zones to partitions (Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode).
4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.
5. Assign users to partitions.
6. Enable the GOTO feature (program field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user can log on to (alpha keypad
only).
7. Program partition-specific fields (see the Data Field Descriptions section).
Common Lobby Logic
When an installation consists of a partition shared by users of other partitions in a building, that shared partition may
be assigned as the "common lobby" partition for the system (program field 1*17). An example of this might be in a
medical building where there are two doctors’ offices and a common entrance area (see example that follows
explanation).
The Common Lobby feature employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common lobby. Two programming
fields determine the way the common lobby will react relative to the status of other partitions. They are: 1*18 Affects
Lobby and 1*19 Arms Lobby.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
2-2
1*18 Affects Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:
a. When the first partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby is automatically disarmed.
b. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.
1*19 Arms Lobby (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this field to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of the common lobby as follows:
a. The common lobby cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the lobby is armed.
b. Arming a partition that is programmed to arm the lobby causes the system to automatically attempt to arm the
lobby. If any faults exist in the lobby partition, or if another partition that affects the lobby is disarmed, the lobby
cannot be armed, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.
You cannot select a partition to "arm" the lobby unless it has first been selected to "affect" the lobby. Do not enable
field 1*19 without enabling field 1*18.
The following chart sums up how the common lobby partition will operate.
1*18
Affects Lobby
1*19
Arms Lobby
Disarms when
partition disarms? Attempts to arm
when partition
arms?
Can be armed if
other partitions
disarmed?
0 0 NO NO YES
1 0 YES NO NO
1 1 YES YES NO
0 1 ---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---
Example
Here is an example of how the lobby would react in a typical setup.
OFFICE 1 OFFICE 2
MAIN ENTRANCE
COMMON LOBBY
V128BP-001-V0
User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Lobby.
User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Lobby.
Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Lobby, but not arm it.
Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Lobby.
NOTE: In the tables below, the notations in parentheses ( )
indicate the current status of the other partition when the user
takes action.
Sequence #1:
Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action
User #1: Disarms (Armed) Disarms
User #2: (Disarmed) Disarms No Change
User #1: Arms (Disarmed) No change
User #2: (Armed) Arms Arms
Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking
2-3
Sequence #2:
Office 1 Office 2 Lobby Action
User #2: (Armed) Disarms Disarms
User #1: Disarms (Disarmed) (No change)
User #2: (Disarmed) Arms No Change
User #1: Arms (Armed) No Change
Notice that in sequence #1, because Office #2 was the last to arm, the lobby also armed (Office #2 is programmed to
affect and arm the lobby). In sequence #2, the lobby could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which
affects the lobby, was still disarmed.
When Office #1 armed, the lobby still did not arm because Office #1 was not programmed to arm the lobby. User #1
would have to arm the lobby manually. Therefore, you would want to program a partition to affect and arm the lobby if
the users of that partition are expected to be the last to leave the building.
How User Access Codes Affect the Common Lobby
Codes with Global Arming
If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see SECTION 9: User Access Codes), the keypad prompts the user
to select the partitions they want to arm. Only the partitions the user has access to are displayed. This allows the user
to choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of the lobby. Keep in
mind, however, that if a user attempts to arm all, and another "affecting" partition is disarmed, the user cannot arm the
lobby, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" is displayed.
Codes with Non-Global Arming
If a user arms with a non-global code, the lobby partition operation is automatic, as described by fields 1*18 and 1*19.
Other Methods of Arming/Disarming
Common Lobby logic remains active when arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common lobby in
one of the following manners:
Quick-Arm
Keyswitch
Wireless Button
Wireless Keypad
Arming/Disarming Remotely
If a user arms or disarms remotely (through Compass downloading software), the lobby does not automatically follow
another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be armed separately, after arming all
affecting partitions first.
Auto-Arming/Disarming
If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common lobby partition does not automatically
follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the lobby. The lobby must be included as a partition to be
armed/disarmed and must be scheduled as the last partition armed.
If you are using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-Arm Delay and Auto-Arm Warning periods, for the lobby
partition, (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition that affects the lobby. This
causes the lobby to arm last.
Master Keypad Setup and Operation
Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for the purpose of assigning
keypads as Master keypads for the system.
Assigning any keypad to Partition 9 in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode makes that keypad a Master keypad.
A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system (Partitions 1-8) on its display at one time. This is useful
because it eliminates the need for a building security officer to have to log on to various partitions from one partition's
keypad to find out where an alarm has occurred.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
2-4
The following is a typical display:
S Y S T E M 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S T A T U S R R N N A B
Possible status indications include:
A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum C = Comm Fail
I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready = Alarm T = Trouble
F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery
To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter [] + Partition No. (e.g., [] + [4]). This allows
viewing only of that partition. In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has access to that
partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log on to Partition 9 to view the status of all partitions, that user
must have access to all partitions. Otherwise, access is denied.
The following is displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2 (Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when a
user logs on from a keypad on Partition 9:
WHSE DISARMED
HIT FOR FAULTS
Pressing [] causes the following display to appear at Partition 1's keypad(s):
FAULT 002 LOADING
DOCK WINDOW
Additional zone faults are displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status, press [] + Partition No.
The Armed LED on a Master keypad is lit only if all partitions have been armed successfully. The Ready LED is lit only
if all partitions are "ready to arm." Neither LED is lit if only some partitions are armed and/or only some partitions are
ready.
Press [] + [0] or [] + [9] to return to the master partition. Otherwise, if no keys are pressed for 2 minutes, the system
automatically returns to the master partition
The sounder on a Master keypad reflects the sound of the most critical condition on all of the partitions. The priority of
the sounds, from most to least critical, is as follows:
1. Pulsing fire alarm sounds
2. Steady burglar alarm sounds
3. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)
Silence the sounder by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad on the partition where the condition exists.
A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are sent to Partition 1, and will
activate on Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be programmed for Partition 1.
Panel Linking
Up to eight VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP control panels may be networked, enabling a user to control the features of all
control panels from a single location. The panel linking bus supports an end-to-end network length of up to 4,000 feet,
making it ideal for multi-building environments (e.g., a shopping mall, college campus, etc.).
UL Panel Linking is not permitted in UL installations.
Panel linking requires a VA8200 Panel Link Module (PLM) on each VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP. Users can link (access
other control panels) in any of three different modes: Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode; Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel
Mode; Multi-Panel View Mode. These modes are described later in this section.
Each PLM connects to the ECP bus on the control panel and communicates to each PLM via an RS-485 bus (3-wire
twisted cable run) with a maximum wire-run of 4000 feet end-to-end.
Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking
2-5
Users 001-050 are the only users that can perform panel linking and are automatically assigned panel
linking access when added to the system.
An alpha keypad must be used for panel linking.
The system may take up to 7 seconds to respond to a command when in a panel linking mode
NOTE: A user cannot access partitions or panels that they have not been assigned to.
Panel Link Module Supervision
The Panel Link Module can be supervised for its connection to the control panel. The module’s supervisory zone is zone
8xx, where “xx” = the ECP address of the PLM. You must program that zone with response type 05 (Day/Night) in Zone
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode (refer to the Programming Guide for detailed programming instructions). If you
want to report the supervisory failure to the central station and/or to a paging service, the appropriate reporting
parameters for that zone must be programmed.
If you want the supervisory failure of PLM(s) on other linked control panels to display on this control panel, they must
be programmed into Zone Programming in the #93 Menu Mode with response type 14 in this control panel (refer to the
Programming Guide for detailed programming instructions). The panel ID number for each module must match the
panel ID number programmed in Device Programming of its “host” VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP.
How to Use Panel Linking
Panel Linking can be used in any of three different modes:
Single-Partition, Single-Panel displays status of a partition on a remote control panel and allows control of that
remote control panel.
Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode displays status and allows arming/disarming of multiple partitions at once on
a remote control panel.
Multi-Panel View Mode displays status and allows arming/disarming of multiple remote control panels at a time.
NOTE: A user will not be able to access or view partitions or panels that they have not been assigned to.
Single-Partition Single-Panel Mode
To access the Single-Partition, Single Panel mode, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter
User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [86].
2 Enter the panel ID number (01-08) of the panel you want to link to.
3 Enter the partition number of the panel. The keypad displays “AWAITING PANEL LINK.” After a few
seconds, the keypad displays the status of the partition along with the panel ID number and partition
number flashing in the upper right-hand corner. The user now has full control of the remote control panel.
All functions can be performed except the following:
Those limited by the user’s authority level.
The user cannot enter Installer Program mode.
The user cannot execute another panel linking mode.
NOTE: To execute another panel linking mode or to access a different remote panel, the user must first exit
this mode (return to the original control panel).
4 To exit, enter the User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [85]. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the
status of the original partition for the keypad.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
2-6
Multi-Partition Multi-Panel Mode
To perform a function in the Multi-Partition, Multi Panel mode, follow the steps below:
Step Action
1 Enter
User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [88].
The keypad displays the following:
PANELnn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS x x x x x x x x
where “nn” = panel ID number (01-08), “12345678” are the partition numbers and “xxxxxxxx” is the status
of each partition of that panel. Status indications include:
A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum
I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready = Alarm T = Trouble
F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery
C = Comm Fail
NOTES: See table later in this section for priority of displays.
A ” under a partition number indicates the user does NOT have access to that partition.
2 The following functions can be performed:
Press [1] to attempt to disarm all partitions.
Press [2] to attempt to arm AWAY all partitions.
Press [3] to attempt to arm STAY all partitions.
Press [4] to attempt to arm MAXIMUM all partitions.
Press [7] to attempt to arm INSTANT all partitions.
Press [] to read the status of the next panel.
Press [#] key to read the status of the previous panel.
Press [0] to exit mode. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the status of the original partition of the
original panel for the keypad. Also, this mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.
NOTES: When performing any of the arming commands, if there are faults in any of the partitions, none
of the partitions will arm. These faults must be corrected or bypassed before attempting to arm.
When performing either a STAY or INSTANT arm command the system always arms in mode 1.
The user cannot execute another panel linking mode. To execute another panel linking mode or
to access a different remote panel, the user must first exit this mode (return to the original
control panel).
Section 2 – Partitioning and Panel Linking
2-7
Multi-Panel View Mode
To perform a function in the Multi-Panel View mode, follow the steps below:
Step Action
1 Enter
User Code (for users 001-050) + [#] + [87].
The keypad displays the following typical display:
ALLPANEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS x x x x x x x x
where “12345678” are the panel ID numbers and “xxxxxxxx” is the overall status of each panel. Status
indications include:
A = Armed Away S = Armed Stay M = Armed Maximum
I = Armed Instant R = Ready N = Not Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready = Alarm T = Trouble
F = Fire Alarm P = AC Power Failure L = Low System Battery
C = Comm Fail
NOTE: See table later in this section for priority of displays.
2 The following functions can be performed::
Press [1] to attempt to disarm all partitions on all panels.
Press [2] to attempt to arm AWAY all partitions on all panels.
Press [3] to attempt to arm STAY all partitions on all panels.
Press [4] to attempt to arm MAXIMUM all partitions.
Press [7] to attempt to arm INSTANT all partitions.
Press [0] to exit mode. After a few seconds, the keypad displays the status of the original partition of the
original panel for the keypad. Also, this mode will end in approximately 120 seconds if no keys are pressed.
NOTES:
When performing any of the arming commands, if there are faults in any of the partitions of a panel, the
system will not arm that panel, but will arm all the other partitions of the other panels.
When performing either a STAY or INSTANT arm command, the system always arms in mode 1 (see the
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP User Guide for a detailed explanation of the STAY and INSTANT arming
modes).
The user cannot execute another panel linking mode. In order to perform another panel linking mode or to
access a different remote panel, the user must first exit this mode (return to the original control panel).
Priority of Displays for Multi-Partition and Multi-Panel Modes
This table shows the priority of displays if more than one of these conditions exists at the same time.
Priority Description Display Priority Description Display
1 Fire Alarm F 8 Not Ready N
2 All Other Alarms
9 Ready R
3 AC Loss P 10 Armed STAY S
4 Comm Fail C 11 Armed AWAY A
5 System Low Battery L 12 Armed INSTANT I
6 Trouble T 13 Armed MAXIMUM M
7 Bypass B
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
2-8
3-1
SECTION 3
Installing the Control
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
This section describes the procedures for mounting and wiring the control panel and all the peripheral devices.
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250BP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the
table listing the differences between the VISTA-128BP and the VISTA-250BP control panels.
Mounting the Control Cabinet
To mount the control cabinet, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that you will be using.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN
INSTALLED.
2 Using fasteners or anchors (not supplied), mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall in a clean, dry area
that is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.
UL To provide certificated burglary service for UL installations, refer to the special requirements and
Figure 3-2
Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations
to follow.
Installing the Cabinet Lock
1. Remove cabinet door, then remove the lock
knockout from the door. Insert the key into the
lock.
2. Position the lock in the hole, making certain
that the latch will make contact with the latch
bracket when the door is closed.
3. When correctly positioned, push the lock until
it is held securely by its snap tabs.
Use an ADEMCO No. K4445 Lock (supplied).
CABINET DOOR
BOTTOM
LOCKED
UNLOCKED
cab_lock_snap-001-V0
ADEMCO
ADEMCO
PUSH
SNAP
TAB
SNAP
TAB
PUSH
ON LOCK
UNTIL IT
IS SEATED
SECURELY
STEP 2STEP 1
CHECK
POSITION
Figure 3-1: Installing the Lock
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing Guidelines
The panel door must be supervised. Mount the
clip-on tamper switch (supplied) to the cabinet's
right side wall as shown in the diagram below, and
wire it to one of the hardwire zones.
Use a bell with a tamper-protected housing such as
the ADEMCO AB12. The bell housing's tamper
switch and inner tamper linings must also be wired
to the hardwire zone.
Assign the tampers’ hardwire zone to a burglary
partition. Program the hardwire zone for day
trouble/night alarm (zone type 5) when only one
burglary partition is used. Program it for 24-hr.
audible alarm (zone type 7) when more than one
burglary partition is used.
All wiring between the bell and panel must be run
in conduit. Remaining wires do not need to be run
in conduit.
All wiring that is not run in conduit must exit from
the knockout openings on the bottom or back of the
cabinet.
All unused knockouts must be plugged using the
disc plugs and carriage bolts (supplied), as
indicated in the diagram below.
Fasten the cabinet door to the cabinet backbox
using the 18 one-inch-long Phillips-head screws
(supplied) after all wiring, programming, and
checkout procedures have been completed.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-2
PC
BOARD
(Shows typical local Grade A listing installation)
RUN BELL WIRES
IN CONDUIT
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
PLUG THIS
KNOCKOUT
RUN ALL REMAINING
WIRE THROUGH HERE
CLIP-ON DOOR
TAMPER SWITCH
CABINET
MOUNTING
HOLE
(4 PLACES)
TO PLUG AN UNUSED KNOCKOUT OPENING,
REMOVE KNOCKOUT AND INSTALL A PAIR OF
DISC PLUGS AND A CARRIAGE BOLT AS SHOWN.
KNOCKOUT
OPENING
HEX NUT AND
WASHER
DISC PLUGS (DIMPLES IN DISC
PLUG SHOULD REGISTER INSIDE
KNOCKOUT OPENING)
CARRIAGE BOLT
CABINET SIDE WALL
(OUTSIDE)
cabattack-001-V0
Figure 3-2: Cabinet Attack Resistance Considerations
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing Guidelines
Follow the guidelines given above for Grade A
Mercantile Premises listing.
Mount a shock sensor such as Sentrol No. 5402 to
the control's backbox. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions for proper sensor mounting. This
sensor also must be wired to a hardwire zone.
For safe and vault applications, a UL Listed
contact must be used inside the cabinet through
one of the knockouts for pry-off tamper purposes.
This sensor also must be wired to a hardwire zone.
Installing the Control's Circuit Board
To install the circuit board in the cabinet, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Hang the three mounting clips on the raised
cabinet tabs. Refer to Figure 3-3 (Detail B).
Make sure the clip orientation is exactly as
shown in the diagram to avoid damage. This
will also avoid problems with insertion and
removal of the PC board.
2 Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots
at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that the
board rests in the slots as indicated (Detail A).
3 Swing the base of the board into the mounting
clips and secure the board to the cabinet with
the accompanying screws.
Notes:
Make certain that the mounting screws are tight.
This ensures that there is a good ground
connection between the PC board and the cabinet.
Dress field wiring away from the microprocessor
(center) section of the PC board. Use the loops on
the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for
anchoring field wiring using tie wraps (Detail C).
These steps are important to minimize the risk of
panel RF interference with television reception.
+
+
+
DETAIL C
SIDE VIEW
OF SLOTS
DETAIL A
SIDE VIEW OF
BOARD INSERTED
INTO SLOTS
DETAIL B
SIDE VIEW OF SHORT
MOUNTING CLIPS
(TYP.)
hi_end_mnt-PCB
Figure 3-3: Mounting the PC Board
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-3
Installing the Keypads
Up to 31 addressable keypads (addresses 00-30)
may be used (you may need to use an auxiliary
power supply if the 750mA aux. output is
exceeded). The following keypads may be used:
2-line alpha display, 6139/6160
To wire the keypads, perform the following steps:
Step Action
Determine wire gauge by referring to the
Wire Run Length/Gauge table below.
Wire Run Length/Gauge Table
Wire Gauge Length
#22 gauge 450 feet
#20 gauge 700 feet
#18 gauge 1100 feet
#16 gauge 1750 feet
1
2 Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect
individual keypads to separate wire runs.
The maximum wire run length from the
control to a keypad, which is homerun back
to the control must not exceed the lengths
listed in the table.
3 Run field wiring from the control to the
keypads (using standard 4-conductor cable
of the wire gauge determined in step 1).
4 Connect the keypad(s) to terminals 6, 7, 8,
and 9 on the control board, as shown in
Figure 3-4.
The length of all wire runs combined,
regardless of the wire gauge, must not
exceed 2000 feet when unshielded quad
conductor cable is used (1000 feet if
unshielded cable is run in conduit, which
acts a shield, or if shielded cable is used).
If more than one keypad is wired to one run,
then the above maximum lengths must be
divided by the number of keypads on the run
(e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet if two
keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).
KEYPADS
BLACK
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
CONTROL
TERMINALS
6
7
8
9
Figure 3-4: Keypad Connections to Control Panel
Addressing the Keypads
The keypads will not operate until they are
physically addressed and enabled in the
system's
Device Programming
in the
#93 Menu
Mode
.
Set each keypad for an individual address (00-30)
according to the keypad's instructions. Set an alpha
keypad for address 00 and other keypads for higher
addresses (00 and 01 are enabled in the system's
default program). Any keypads set for address 02 and
above will appear blank until they are enabled in the
system's program. Each keypad must be set for a
different address.
Do not set any keypads to address 31
(nonaddressable mode). They will interfere
with other keypads (as well as other devices)
connected to the keypad terminals.
If an “OC” or “OPEN CIRCUIT” message is
present on a keypad, data from the control is
not reaching the keypad. Please check your
wiring.
Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads
When the control’s auxiliary power load for all devices
exceeds 750mA, you can power additional keypads from
a regulated 12VDC power supply (e.g., ADEMCO
AD12612 (1.2A)). Use a UL Listed, battery-backed
supply for UL installations.
Connect the additional keypads as shown in Figure 3-5,
using the keypad wire colors shown. Be sure to observe
the current ratings for the power supply used.
Make connections directly to the screw
terminals as shown in
Figure 3-5
. Make no
connection to the keypad blue wire (if
present).
Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal
on the power supply unit to terminal 7 () on
the control.
+
+
678 9
SUPPLEMENTARY
POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL TERMINAL STRIP
AUX. AUX. DATA
IN DATA
OUT
IMPORTANT:
MAKE THESE
CONNECTIONS
DIRECTLY TO
SCREW
TERMINALS AS
SHOWN.
RED WIRE
BLACK WIRE
YELLOW WIRE
GREEN WIRE
BLACK WIRE
RED WIRE
GREEN WIRE
YELLOW WIRE
pwr_supply-002-V0
TO
MAIN
KEYPAD
TO
SECONDARY
KEYPAD
Figure 3-5: Using A Supplementary Power Supply
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-4
Installing External Sounders
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP provides a bell circuit
output for operating fire and burglary alarm
notification appliances. The alarm output is rated as
follows: 10VDC – 14VDC, 1.7A max., power-limited.
UL For Household Fire and combination
Household Fire/Burglary installations, the
total current drawn from the auxiliary power,
polling loop, and alarm output combined
must not exceed 750mA.
For Household Burglary installations, the
total current drawn from the alarm output
must not exceed 1.7A. A battery must be
installed, as it supplies the current for the
combined auxiliary power, polling loop, and
alarm output in excess of 750mA.
The output has the following options:
Selectable for supervision.
Selectable for confirmation of arming ding.
Selectable to chime when entry/exit or perimeter
zones are faulted.
Selectable for no timeout or timeout of 2-30
minutes.
UL Burglary bell circuits must be programmed for
a timeout of 16 minutes or longer.
UL985 Household Fire or Combination Household
Fire/Burglary Installations
For installations that must provide UL Listed
protection, the total combined current drawn from the
alarm output, auxiliary power output, and polling loop
must not exceed 750mA in order to comply with the
battery independence requirements. If, for example,
two System Sensor PA400 piezo alarm sounders, wired
in parallel, are used (24mA total), then 726mA (750mA
– 24mA) is available for auxiliary output and polling
loop use.
UL1023 Household Burglary Installations
For Household Burglary installations, the total current
drawn from the alarm output must not exceed 1.7A. A
battery must be installed, as the battery supplies
current from the combined auxiliary power, polling
loop, and alarm output in excess of 750mA.
Non-UL Installations
For non-UL installations, the total current drawn from
this output can be up to 1.7 amps. A battery must be
installed, as the battery supplies current in excess of
750mA. Up to two 719 sirens can be used wired in
parallel.
UL This control complies with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) requirements
for temporal pulse sounding of fire notification
appliances.
Alarm Output Supervision
When supervision is enabled, the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-
250BP monitors the alarm output wiring for open and
short circuit faults while the output is inactive. The
system provides a trouble indication (Zone 970) when
an open occurs; or when a short occurs between the Bell
(+) and Bell (-) terminal wiring, or between the Bell (+)
terminal wiring and earth ground.
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP indicates the trouble
condition regardless of whether the system is armed or
disarmed. The zone displays on the keypads, reports to
the event log, and transmits to the central station (if
programmed) on Partition 1. The Contact ID event
code is 321, Bell Trouble. The trouble is cleared from
the display by entering the user code + OFF.
Wiring the Alarm Output
The wiring of the alarm output depends upon whether
you are going to supervise the output or not. Use the
appropriate procedure below for your application.
UL Use only UL Listed sounding devices for UL
installations.
Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices
Model Number Device Type Polarizing
Diode
719 Compact Outdoor Siren
(not UL Listed)
Yes
747 Indoor Siren Yes
AB12 Grade A Bell Yes
System Sensor
MA 12/24D Fire Piezo Horn No
System Sensor
P12575 Fire Horn/Strobe No
Wheelock
AS-121575W
Fire Horn/Strobe No
ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT:
1-VDC - 13.8VDC
1.7A MAXIMUM
BELL
HORN
7
6
+-
+-
8
3
124
fire_devices-001-V0
5
Figure 3-6: Wiring Polarized Fire Devices
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-5
PANEL BELL
PANEL BELL
TO
OTHER
DEVICES
NONPOLARIZED BURGLARY
INDICATING DEVICES POLARIZED FIRE
INDICATING DEVICE
POLARIZING DIODES
(MUST MOUNT AT INDICATING DEVICE)
BELL BELL HORN
non_polar_devices
Figure 3-7: Wiring Nonpolarized Burglary Devices
Supervising the Alarm Output
To wire the alarm output using the supervision feature,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Wire polarized fire-indicating devices to the
alarm output as shown in Figure 3-6.
2 Wire nonpolarized burglary indicating
devices to the alarm output using a
polarizing diode (two 2A diodes supplied), as
shown in Figure 3-7.
3 Program Zone 970 with a response type of 05
(trouble by day/alarm by night).
The minimum load on the alarm output must
exceed 5mA at 12V for proper supervision
operation.
Using a Siren Driver
To install a siren driver, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the siren driver in the panel’s cabinet.
2 Wire the siren driver to the control and to the
speaker(s). (See the driver’s instructions.)
3 Cut the blue jumper on the upper left-hand
corner of the panel’s PC board.
4 Program Zone 970 with no response type (00).
UL If a device such as a siren driver with a high-
resistance trigger input (drawing less than 5mA)
is used in a UL Household Fire installation, the
siren driver must independently supervise siren
speaker wiring.
Disabling the Supervision of the Alarm Output
To install the alarm output and disable the supervision
feature, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Wire the devices to terminals 4 and 5,
observing polarity if necessary.
2 Cut the blue jumper on the upper left-hand
corner of the panel’s PC board.
3 Program Zone 970 with no response type (00).
Telephone Line Connections
Connect the main dialer output to telephone company
lines using the RJ31X cables supplied.
TERMINALS
ON CONTROL
EARTH GROUND
INCOMING TELCO LINE
Handset
TIP
RING
RJ31X
JACK
PLUG
DIRECT
CONNECT
CORD
TIP
RING
GROUND
PREMISES
PHONES
{
{
BROWN (TIP)
GREY (RING)
GREEN (TIP)
RED (RING)
26 27 28 29 30
Incoming
Telco Line
Figure 3-8: Telephone Line Connections
UL The telephone line inputs have overvoltage
protection in accordance with UL1459, as
specified in UL985/UL1023.
The system is shipped defaulted for Contact
ID format. It is the only format capable of
uniquely reporting all 250, as well as
openings and closings for all 250 users. This
requires central stations to be equipped with
the ADEMCO 685 receiver using software
level 4.7 or higher. If you need to update your
685 receiver, contact your distributor.
To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect
phone lines at telco jack before servicing
the panel.
If the communicator is connected to a
telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the
PABX has a backup power supply that
can support the PABX for 24 hours
(central station usage) or 60 hours
(remote station usage). Many PABXs are
not
power-backed up, and connection to
such a PABX results in a communication
failure if power is lost
.
Reporting Formats
The system supports the following formats:
ADEMCO Low Speed 3+1; 4+1; 4+2; Sescoa/Radionics
3+1; 4+1; 4+2; ADEMCO 4+2 Express; ADEMCO High
Speed; ADEMCO Contact ID
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-6
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to Zones 1-9
The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for
zones 1 and 8, and 300 ohms for all other
zones (excluding the 2K EOL resistor).
To wire burglary and panic devices to zones 1-9,
connect sensors/contacts to the hardwire zone terminals
(10 through 23). See Figure 3-9. Connect N.C. and N.O.
devices as follows:
Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+)
side of the loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be
connected in series with the devices, following the
last device.
Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the
loop. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected
across the loop wires at the last device.
++
-
N.C. N.C.
N.O.
2k EOLR 2k EOLR
+-
++
-
N.C. N.C.
2k EOLR 2k EOLR
++
-
N.C.
++
-
N.C. N.C.
2k EOLR
SMOKE
Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM
ZONE 1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP
(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTORS
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
N.C.
N.O.
N.O. N.O.
2k EOLR
N.O. N.O. N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
2k EOLR
2k EOLR
N.C.
GLASS
BREAK
Fire
Usage
Burg.
Usage
Red Jumper
Zone response time:
ZONES 1-9: 350mSec-500mSec
ZONE 9: Also Programmable
for RS232 input
HWZones-002
Figure 3-9: Wiring Connections for Zones 1-9
Using 2-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zone 1
Zone 1 can support up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors.
The alarm current on zone 1 supports only one
smoke detector in the alarmed state.
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors
DETECTOR TYPE DEVICE MODEL #
Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2400
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire System Sensor 2400TH
Photoelectric w/B401B base System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric w/heat sensor & B401B System Sensor 2451TH
Ionization, direct-wire System Sensor 1400
Ionization w/B401B base System Sensor 1451
Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base) System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric duct detect (DH400 base) System Sensor 2451
Ionization duct detector (DH400 base) System Sensor 1451DH
Ionization, direct-wire System Sensor 1100
Ionization w/B110LP base System Sensor 1151
Photoelectric, direct-wire System Sensor 2100
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct-wire System Sensor 2100T
Photoelectric w/B110LP base System Sensor 2151
UL
These smoke detectors are UL Listed for use
with the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP and are
the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be
used.
Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1
2K EOL resistors must be used on fire zones
and must be connected across the loop wires
of each zone at the last detector.
To wire 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Select up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors from
the list of compatible detectors.
2 Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1
terminals (10 and 11) as shown in Figure 3-
10. Observe proper polarity when connecting
the detectors.
3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last detector
in the loop across the zone 1 terminals. The
EOL resistor must be connected across
the loop wires at the last detector.
2k EOLR
ZONE 1
SMOKE
(+)
(-)
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR
10
11
(+)
(-)
Figure 3-10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector on Zone 1
Using 4-Wire Smoke Detectors on Zones 1-8
You may use as many 4-wire smoke detectors as can be
powered from the panel's Auxiliary Power output
without exceeding the output's rating (750mA).
Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is
not automatically reset after an alarm, and
therefore must be momentarily interrupted
using either the J7 smoke detector reset output
trigger or a 4204 Relay Module.
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Use any UL Listed 4-wire smoke detector that is rated
for 10-14VDC operation and that has alarm reset time
not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire
smoke detectors are listed below.
Detector Type Detector Model #
Photoelectric, direct wire System Sensor 2412
Photoelectric w/heat
sensor, direct wire System Sensor 2412TH
Ionization, direct wire System Sensor 1412
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-7
Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
UL Power to 4-wire smoke detectors must be
supervised with an EOL device (use a System
Sensor A77-716B EOL relay module
connected as shown in
Figure 3-11
).
+
+
+
+
+
HEAT
DETECTOR
4-WIRE
SMOKE
DETECTORS
V128BP-002-V0
NO CONNECTION
CNC NO RESET
RELAY 1, 2, 3, OR 4
4204 RELAY MODULE
NOTES:
· PROGRAM THE RELAY TO
TRANSFER ON FIRE ZONE
RESET (ACTIVATION CODE 54).
SEE 4204 RELAY MODULE
SECTION FOR DETAILS.
· SECOND CODE AND OFF
ENTERED AT CONSOLE
MOMENTARILY INTERRUPTS
DETECTOR POWER.
SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST.
EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
A77-716B
2k
EOLR
TO
FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS
TO
AUXILIARY
POWER
TERMINALS
Figure 3-11: 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
To wire 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8, perform
the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select 4-wire smoke detectors (see list of
compatible detectors shown previously in
this section).
2 Connect detectors (including heat detectors,
if used) across terminals of the zone
selected. All detectors must be wired in
parallel. See Figure 3-11.
NOTE: If you are using the J7 output
trigger to reset the smoke detectors, refer to
Smoke Detector Reset later in this section for
the wiring instructions.
3 Connect the EOLR at the last detector in the
loop across the zone’s terminals. You must
connect the EOLR across the loop wires
at the last detector.
Using Smoke Power Reversal Module
The 333 PRM Polarity Reversing Module is used to
reverse the polarity of the positive and negative
voltages powering smoke detectors. The module is for
use with 4-wire smoke detectors that employ a sounder
and voltage-reversing feature. The module is triggered
by a pulsing bell output.
Smoke Detectors Compatible with the 333PRM
The 333PRM may be used with the System Sensor
2112/24AT and similar models with the required
operating features previously stated.
The 333PRM reverses polarity to smoke
detectors with Integral Temp-3 Sounders.
Typically, in alarm, each draws 49-60mA of
current. The control panel supplies only enough
current for one smoke detector. In order to attach
more than one, an external power supply and an
external relay may be required.
Installing the 333 PRM
Mount the 333 PRM inside the control panel’s cabinet
or in a separate cabinet using the double-sided tape
provided. Wire the 333PRM as shown in Figures 3-12a,
b or c. Refer to the 333PRM Installation Instructions
for detailed information on the installation of the
module.
-
+
-
+
-
+
EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
A77-761B
4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS
2000
OHM
EOLR
TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS
HEAT
DETECTOR
+
SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST
333PRM-001-V0
333 PRM
7
6
5
4
3
-2
+1
8
JUMPER
P1
NC
MOMENTARY
RESET SWITCH
JUMPER P1 ON
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN
"B" POSITION
FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
CONTROL PANEL
746
Figure 3-12a: Wiring a 333PRM to the Control
-
+
-
+
-
+
EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
A77-761B
4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS
2000
OHM
EOLR
TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS
HEAT
DETECTOR
+
SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST
333PRM-002-V0
333 PRM
7
6
5
4
3
-2
+1
8
JUMPER
NC CNO
P1
JUMPER P1 ON
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN
"B" POSITION
FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
4204
CONTROL PANEL
2 3 41 12
76 4
Figure 3-12b: Wiring a 333PRM using a 4204
-
+
-
+
-
+
EOL POWER
SUPERVISION
RELAY MODULE
A77-761B
4-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTORS
2000
OHM
EOLR
TO FIRE ZONE
TERMINALS
HEAT
DETECTOR
+
SHOWN POWERED.
RELAY OPENS WHEN
POWER IS LOST
333PRM-003-V0
POWER
SUPPLY 333 PRM
7
6
5
4
3
+
-2
+1
8
JUMPER
P1
USE A 12VDC,
BATTERY-BACKED,
UL LISTED POWER
SUPPLY.
JUMPER P1 ON
333 MODULE
MUST BE IN
"B" POSITION
FOUR-WIRE DETECTOR CIRCUIT
4204
CONTROL PANEL
234 112
76 4
Figure 3-12c: Wiring a 333PRM using a 4204 and a
Power Supply
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-8
Using 2-Wire Latching Glassbreaks on Zone 8
Zone 8 can support 2-wire glassbreak detectors. The
zone provides enough standby current to power up to 50
2-wire glassbreak detectors meeting the requirements
listed below.
Compatible Glassbreak Detectors
Use detectors that meet the following ratings:
Standby
Voltage: 5VDC–13.8VDC
Standby
Resistance: Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent
resistance of all detectors in parallel)
Alarm
Resistance: Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)
Alarm
Current: 2mA–10mA
Reset Time: Less than 6 seconds
NOTES:
You can use detectors that exceed 1.1k ohms in
alarm, provided they maintain a voltage drop of
less than 3.8 volts in alarm.
The IEI 735L Series detectors have been tested and
found to be compatible with these ratings.
21
22
GLASSBREAK
DETECTOR
ZONE 8
(+)
(-)
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
2000
OHMS
EOLR
Figure 3-13: Wiring Latching Glassbreaks to Zone 8
The alarm current provided by zone 8
supports only one glassbreak detector in
the alarmed state.
Do not use other N.O. or N.C. contacts
when using glassbreak detectors on zone
8. Other contacts may prevent proper
glassbreak detector operation.
To wire 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors to zone 8,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select compatible 2-wire glassbreak
detectors that meet the requirements stated
previously.
2 Connect detectors across zone 8 (terminals
21 and 22). See Figure 3-13.
3 Connect the EOL resistor at the last
detector in the loop across the zone’s
terminals. You must connect the EOL
resistor across the loop wires at the
last detector.
Tamper Supervision for the Hardwired Zones
The system can be programmed to monitor for either an
open condition or a short condition of a tamper switch
on zones 1-8. End-of-line supervision is required for
this option.
Wiring a Tamper Switch to Zones 1-8
The wiring of the tamper switch depends on whether
the tamper switch and the sensor are normally open or
normally closed.
If you are using a normally closed sensor, the
tamper switch must be normally open. Refer to
Figure 3-14 for the wiring configuration.
If you are using a normally open sensor, the
tamper switch must be normally closed. Refer to
Figure 3-15 for the wiring configuration.
For the normally closed sensor, program the
zone for trouble on short. For the normally open
sensor, program the zone for trouble on open.
To wire a tamper switch on a hardwired zone, connect
the EOL resistor at the last detector in the loop across
the zone’s terminals. You must connect the EOL
resistor at the last detector for proper operation
of the tamper supervision.
NOTE: For zones with a response type of 9 or 16 (Fire),
the tamper selection must be “0” none.
2k EOLR
+
TAMPER
SWITCH
SENSOR
Figure 3-14: Wiring a Normally Closed Loop for
Tamper Supervision
2k EOLR
+
TAMPER
SWITCH
SENSOR
Figure 3-15: Wiring a Normally Open Loop for
Tamper Supervision
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-9
Installing RPM Devices
The polling loop provides both power and data to the
RPM devices, and is constantly monitoring the status of
all zones enabled on the loop. The maximum current
draw of all devices on the polling loop cannot total more
than 128mA (unless the system uses a 4297 Polling
Loop Extender Module).
Devices that can be programmed via either DIP
switches or the built-in unique serial number
must be set for the serial number mode
operation.
All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel
to the [+] and [-] polling loop terminals of the control
panel (24 and 25). You can wire from device to device,
or have multiple branches connected directly to the
control panel in a star configuration.
Do not run polling loop wires within 6” of AC
power, telephone, or intercom wiring. The
polling loop is carrying data between the control
panel and the devices, interference on this loop
can cause an interruption of this communication.
The polling loop can also cause outgoing
interference on the intercom or phone lines. If
this spacing cannot be achieved, shielded wire
must be used. (Note that the maximum total
wire length supported is cut in half when
shielded wire is used.)
Compatible Polling Loop Devices
Model Number Type
4208 8-Zone Expander
4190WH 2-Zone Expander
4278 Quad PIR
4275 Dual PIR
4194 Surface-Mount Reed Contact (Wide Gap)
4297 Extender Module
4192SD Photoelectric Smoke Detector Devices
4192SDT Photoelectric Smoke Detector w/Heat
Detector
4192CP Ionization Smoke Detector
4101SN Serial Number Single-Output Relay Module
4208U Universal 8-Zone Expander
4939SN-BR
4939SN-GY
Serial Number Surface-Mount Reed
Contacts
4191SN-WH Serial Number Recessed Reed Contact
4959SN Aluminum Overhead Door Contact
7500 Single Technology Glassbreak Detector
9500 Dual Technology Glassbreak Detector
4209U Universal Group Zoning Module
4193SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander
4293SN Serialized 1-Zone Expander
4190SN Serialized 2-Zone Expander
998MX Serialized PIR
UL The 4208 must be mounted either inside the
control panel’s cabinet or in a separate
enclosure that has a tamper-supervised cover.
The 4190WH right loop must not be used, and
the left loop must be EOLR-supervised.
The 4278 right loop cannot be used.
The 4194 is not UL Listed.
The 4297 must be powered from the control
panel’s Auxiliary Power Output or from a UL
Listed supplementary power supply.
The 7500 and 9500 detectors are not UL Listed.
Twisted-pair is recommended for all wire runs.
No more than 64mA may be drawn on any
individual wire run.
When a star configuration is used, the total
length of all wire runs combined cannot exceed
4000 ft (2000 ft. if you are using unshielded
wire in conduit or shielded wire).
To install polling loop devices, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Select devices from the list of compatible
devices shown previously.
2 Set the DIP switches in the device (if
required). Refer to the device’s instructions
for the DIP Switch Tables.
3 Mount each device in the desired location.
Refer to the device’s instructions.
Run wires from the control panel to each
device on the polling loop (see Figure 3-16).
No individual wire run may exceed the
lengths shown in the following table.
Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs
Wire Gauge Max. Length
#22 gauge 650 feet
#20 gauge 950 feet
#18 gauge 1500 feet
#16 gauge 2400 feet
4
5 Wire each device to the polling loop, making
sure of the correct polarity (refer to the
device’s instructions).
NOTE: If you are using serial number
devices, and intend to enroll each device
through the keypad automatically, wire no
more than 25 of these devices to the
control at a time. Then power up and
program them before connecting the next 25.
Leave previously enrolled devices connected.
If you intend to manually enter the serial
numbers through the keypad or through
Compass downloading software, all the
devices may be connected before powering
up to program.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-10
POLLING LOOP RATING:
128mA MAXIMUM
4192SD
SMOKE
4190
RPM
4278
PIR
23
21 22
+-
POLLING LOOP
25
24
TO RIGHT LOOP
poll_loop-001-V0
Figure 3-16: Polling Loop Connections to the
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP
Polling Loop Supervision
A short on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on
zone 997 and reports as a trouble condition only. If
annunciation is desired, program the zone as type 05.
If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot
"see" that device), the system displays a trouble
condition for all zones on that device. If the panel is
armed when a device fails, and the zone is a burglary
zone, the will go into alarm
A trouble on zone 997 prevents a partition from
being armed, unless all polling loop zones on
that partition are bypassed.
Using the 4297 Polling Loop Extender
The 4297 Polling Loop Extender may be used to provide
additional polling loop current, to extend the polling
loop wire run length, and/or to provide individual
electrically isolated polling loops. Refer to Figures 3-17
and 3-18, to follow.
DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender
module with the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP
.
Be sure to include the total current drawn on
the polling loop when figuring the total auxiliary
load on the panel’s power supply.
CONTROL PANEL
RPM
INPUT POLLING LOOP EXTENSION POLLING LOOP
RPM 4297 RPM RPM
TO
OTHER
RPMS
INPUT LOOP LIMITS: EXTENSION POLLING LOOP LIMITS = SAME AS INPUT LOOP
128 mA MAX. LIMIT CURRENT TO 64mA ON ANY
INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN.
NO MORE THAN 64 DEVICES MAY BE USED.
NO INDIVIDUAL WIRE RUN CAN EXCEED:
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS COMBINED CANNOT
EXCEED 4000FT. (2000FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE
GAUGE LENGTH
#22 650 FT
#20 950 FT
#18 1500 FT
#16 2400 FT
• NO MORE THAN119 DEVICES COMBINED.
• TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON BOTH
LOOPS COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT.
(3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED ). WIRE IN
CONDUIT, OR IF USING SHIELDED WIRE
polling_loop_003-V0
COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:
Figure 3-17: Polling Loop Connections Using One
4297 Extender Module
CONTROL PANEL
EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #1
4297
RPM
COMBINED INPUT AND EXTENSION LOOP LIMITS:
NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOPAND EXTENSION
LOOP #1. NO MORE THAN 119 DEVICES COMBINED ON THE INPUT LOOP AND
EXTENSION LOOP #2.
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #1
COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN
CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE). TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL WIRE RUNS ON THE INPUT
LOOP AND EXTENSION LOOP #2 COMBINED CANNOT EXCEED 6400 FT. (3200 FT. IF
USING UNSHIELDED WIRE IN CONDUIT, OR SHIELDED WIRE).
4297 RPM
INPUT POLLING LOOP
DO NOT CONNECT 4297 MODULES IN
SERIES (i.e., DO NOT CONNECT ONE
MODULE'S EXTENSION LOOP TO
ANOTHER MODULE'S INPUT LOOP.)
DO NOT CONNECT MORE THAN TWO
4297 MODULES IN PARALLEL.
polling_loop-004-V0
EXTENSION POLLING LOOP #2
Figure 3-18: Polling Loop Connections Using
Multiple Extender Modules
NOTE: The input loop limits stated in Figure 3-17
apply to Figure 3-18 as well.
Wireless Zone Expansion
UL The 5881ENHC RF Receiver and the 5869 Holdup
Switch Transmitter are listed for UL Commercial
Burglary applications. All other RF receivers and
transmitters are not listed for UL Commercial
Burglary applications.
The following table lists the receivers that may be used
and the number of zones they support.
5800 Series Receivers
Receiver Zones
5881L up to 8
5881M up to 16
5881H up to 250
In Canada, 5800 systems must use 5882 Series
receivers: 5882L/5882H. Information to the 5881
Receivers applies as well to the 5882 Receivers.
Both receivers use the same transmitters.
RF System Operation and Supervision
The 5800 RF system operation has the following
characteristics:
The receiver responds to a frequency of 345MHz.
The receiver has a nominal range of 200 feet.
Supervised transmitters send a supervisory signal
every 70-90 minutes.
Zones 988 and 990 are used to supervise the RF
reception of receivers 2 and 1, respectively. The
reception is supervised for two conditions:
1. The receiver goes “deaf” (doesn’t hear from any
transmitter) within a programmed interval of
time (defined by program field 1*30).
2. Proper RF reception is impeded (i.e., jamming
or other RF interference). The control checks
for this condition every 45 seconds.
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-11
UL A response type (05 Day/Night) must be
programmed for zones 990 (1st receiver) and
988 (2nd receiver) for UL installations.
The 5881ENHC receiver contains front and back
tampers that permit its use in commercial burglary
installations.
You may only mount the 5881ENHC its own plastic
housing. Otherwise, the receiver constantly reports
a tamper condition.
The control checks the receiver connections about
every 45 seconds. The receiver supervisory zone is
8 + 2-digit receiver device address (for example,
Device address 05 = supervisory zone 805).
NOTE: This zone must be programmed with a
response type (e.g., type 05 Day/Night Trouble)
before it supervise the connection to the receiver.
Use two identical receivers to provide either a
greater area of coverage or redundant protection.
They must be set for different addresses.
Any zone from 1 to 250 can be used as a 5800
Series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64
(reserved for a wireless keypad).
RF System Installation Advisories
Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area.
Do not place it on or near metal objects. This will
decrease the range and/or block transmissions.
Install the RF receiver at least 10 feet from the
control panel or any keypads, to avoid interference
from the microprocessors in these units.
If dual receivers are used:
a. They must be at least 10 feet from each other,
as well as from the control panel and remote
keypads.
b. Each receiver must be set to a different device
address. The receiver set to the lower address
is considered the 1st RF receiver for
supervisory purposes.
c. The House IDs must be the same.
d. Using two receivers does not increase the
number of transmitters the system can support
(249 zones using the 5881H, plus a wireless
keypad).
Installation and Setup of the 5881 RF Receivers
Take note of the address you select for the RF
receiver, as this address must be enabled in
the system’s
Device Programming
in the
#93
Menu Mode
.
To install the 5881 RF receiver, perform the following
steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the receiver, following the advisories
stated previously.
2 Set the DIP switches in the receiver for the
address (01-07). See Figure 3-20.
Make sure the address setting is not
being used by another device (keypad,
relay module, etc.).
3 If installing a 5881ENHC, install a flat-head
screw (supplied) in the case tamper tab as
shown in Figure 3-19. When the receiver is
pried from the wall, the tamper tab will
break off and remain on the wall. This will
activate a tamper switch in the receiver and
cause generation of a tamper signal. Note
that this signal will also be generated when
the receiver’s front cover is removed.
4 Connect the receiver’s wire harness to the
keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9). Plug the
connector at the other end of the harness into
the receiver.
5 Refer to the Installation Instructions
provided with the receiver for installations
regarding antenna mounting, etc.
5881ENHC-001-V0
SCREW
Figure 3-19: Installing the 5881ENHC with Tamper
Protection
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-12
TO CONTROL'S REMOTE KEYPAD
CONNECTION POINTS.
USE MAX. of 220 ft. [67m of #22 (0.64mm)
WIRE or 550 ft. (168m) of #18 (1mm) WIRE
FOR EACH RUN. OBSERVE 20 ft. MAX.
FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE INSTALLATIONS.
(SEE RECEIVER'S INSTRUCTIONS.)
DIP SWITCH WHITE AREAS = SWITCH
HANDLES. POSITION 2-4 DETERMINE
RECEIVER'S ADDRESS. CONSULT
CONTROL'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ADDRESS TO USE. DIP SWITCH BELOW
SHOWN SET FOR ADDRESS "0."
SWITCH
POSITION RECEIVER ADDRESS SETTINGS
(" - " MEANS OFF)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4
3
2
1
5PRESENT ONLY ON 5881EH (SEE TEXT AT LEFT)
ON ON ON
ONON
ONON ONON
ONON
ON
FOR FUTURE USE
DIP SWITCH #5 (PRESET ONLY ON 5881EH)
ON: SETS 5881EH FOR USE IN COMMERCIAL
FIRE APPLICATIONS (SEE THE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS)*.
OFF: USE IN NON-COMMERCIAL FIRE
INSTALLATIONS.
* FOR COMMERCIAL FIRE APPLICATIONS
THE 5881EH PC BOARD MUST BE MOUNTED
IN A SEPARATE CABINET (SEE RECEIVER'S
INSTRUCTIONS FOR DETAILS).
MOUNTING
HOLES
INSERT IN
RIGHT-HAND
TERMINALS
CIRCUIT
BOARD
DIP SWITCH
YELLOW
RED
BLACK
GREEN
INTERFERENCE
INDICATOR LED
WIRING
OPENING
PLUG & SOCKET
ANTENNAS
5881-001-V1
Figure 3-20: 5881 RF Receiver (cover removed)
Installing the 5800TM Module
Installation of this module is necessary only if you are
using a 5827BD or 5804BD Bi-directional device.
The address for the 5800TM must be enabled
in the control’s
Device Programming
in the
#93
Menu Mode
as a keypad and then assigned to
a partition.
To install the 5800TM, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the unit using its accompanying
mounting bracket near the RF receiver.
The 5800TM must not be installed within
the control cabinet. It must be between
one and two feet from the receiver’s
antennas.
2 Set the module for the appropriate address.
For Address Setting 28 cut the red jumper;
for Address 29 cut the white jumper; for
Address 30 cut both jumpers.
Make sure the address setting is not
being used by another device (keypad,
relay module, etc.).
3 Connect the module’s wire harness to the
keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9). Plug the
connector at the other end of the harness into
the module.
House ID Sniffer Mode
This mode applies only if you are using a wireless
keypad (e.g., 5827) or bi-directional devices (e.g.,
5804BD). Use the House ID Sniffer mode to make sure
you do not choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby
system. The House ID must be programmed for the
receiver in Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
To enter House ID Sniffer mode, enter your Installer
Code + [#] + [2].
The receiver now “sniffs” out any House IDs in the area
and displays them. Keep the receiver in this mode for
about 2 hours. Use a House ID that is not displayed.
Exit the Sniffer mode by entering your Installer Code
+ OFF.
As Sniffer mode effectively disables RF point
reception, Sniffer mode cannot be entered
while any partition is armed.
5800 Series Transmitter Setup
5800 Series transmitters have the following
characteristics:
Transmitters have built-in serial numbers that
must be enrolled in the system using the #93 Menu
Mode Programming, or input to the control via the
downloader.
Transmitters do not have DIP switches (except
5827, described separately).
Some transmitters, such as the 5816 and 5817, can
support more than one “zone” (referred to as loops
or inputs). Each loop must be assigned a different
zone number.
For button-type transmitters (wireless keys), such
as the 5804 and 5804BD, you must assign a unique
zone number to each individual button used on the
transmitter.
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-13
Transmitter Input Types
All transmitters have one or more unique factory-
assigned input (loop) codes. Transmitters can be
programmed as one of the following types:
Type Description
RM
(RF Motion) Sends periodic check-in signals, as well as fault
and low-battery signals. The control panel
automatically restores the zone to “ready” after a
few seconds. This type is designed for facilities
with multiple motion detectors that may fault and
restore simultaneously. The transmitter must
remain within the receiver’s range.
NOTE: If using RF Motion with a door/window
type transmitter, only loop 1 may be used.
RF
(Supervised
RF)
Sends periodic check-in signals, as well as fault,
restore, and low-battery signals. The transmitter
must remain within the receiver’s range.
UR
(Unsupervised
RF)
Sends all the signals that the RF type does, but
the control does not supervise the check-in
signals. The transmitter may therefore be
carried off-premises.
BR
(Unsupervised
Button RF)
These send only fault signals. They do not send
low-battery signals until they are activated. The
transmitter may be carried off-premises.
Transmitter Supervision
Supervised RF transmitters send a check-in signal to
the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals. If at least one
check-in is not received from each supervised
transmitter within a programmed period (field 131),
the “missing” transmitter number(s) and “CHECK” or
“TRBL” are displayed. Unsupervised RF transmitters
(5802MN, 5804) may be carried off the premises.
Some transmitters have built-in tamper protection, and
annunciate a “CHECK” or “TRBL” condition if covers
are removed.
If a loss of supervision occurs on a transmitter
programmed for Fire, it reports in Contact ID as
a Fire Trouble (373), not Loss of Supervision
(381), to the central station.
Transmitter Battery Life
Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4
to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and
the specific wireless device being used. Factors such as
humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large
swings in temperature may all reduce the actual
battery life in a given installation.
The wireless system can identify a true low battery
situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system
time to arrange a change of battery and maintain
protection for that point within the system.
Some transmitters (e.g., 5802, 5802CP, and 5803)
contain long-life but nonreplaceable batteries. At the
end of their life, the complete unit must be replaced
(and a new serial number enrolled at the control).
Button-type transmitters (e.g., 5801, 5802, 5802CP and
5803) should be periodically tested, as these
transmitters do not send supervisory check-in signals.
To test the transmitters using the Transmitter
ID Sniffer mode and the Go/NoGo Test Mode,
see
SECTION 10: Testing the System
for the
procedures.
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters
Model Product Input Type
5801 Panic Transmitter UR or RF
5802
5802CP
Pendant (Personal Emergency
Transmitter)
Belt Clip (Personal Emergency
Transmitter)
BR Only
5802MN Miniature (Personal Emergency
Transmitter) UR or RF
5802MN2 Miniature (Personal Emergency
Transmitter) UR or RF
5804 Wireless Key Transmitter BR Only
5804BD Wireless Key Bi-directional
Transmitter BR Only
5804BDV Wireless Key Bi-directional
Transmitter with Voice BR Only
Model Product Input Type
5806/5807/
5808 Wireless Photoelectric Smoke
Detectors RF
5816 Door/Window Transmitter RF
5816MN Miniature Door/Window Transmitter
5816TEMP Temperature Sensor Transmitter
5817 Multi-Point Universal Transmitter RF
5818 Recessed Transmitter RF
5827 Wireless Keypad House ID
5827BD Wireless Bi-directional Keypad House ID
5849 Glassbreak Detector RF
5850 Glassbreak Detector RF
5890 PIR Detector RF
5890PI PIR Detector with Pet Immunity RF
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-14
Installing Output Devices
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP support up to 96
outputs. Each device must be programmed as to how to
act (ACTION), when to activate (START), and when to
deactivate (STOP). The 4204, 4204CF, FSA-8, FSA-24,
4140SN and/or Powerline Carrier devices may be used
as output devices.
Installing the 4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules
Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C
(normally open and normally closed) contacts. Each
4204CF module adds two style Y supervised bell
outputs to the system. For 4204CF modules, only
relays 1 and 3 on each module can be programmed.
The relay module will not operate until the
device address you have set the DIP switches
for is enabled in the control’s
Device
Programming
in the
#93 Menu Mode
.
To install the relay modules, see Figures 3-21 and 3-22
and perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Set the 4204 or 4204CF’s DIP switches for a
device address 01-15.
Do not use an address being used by another
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).
2 Mount the 4204 and 4204CF Modules per the
instructions provided with them.
Connect the module’s wire harness to the
control (6, 7, 8, and 9). Plug the connector
(other end of harness) to the module.
If you are mounting remotely, homerun each
module to the control. The table below shows
the maximum wire run lengths. Refer to the
instructions provided with the 4204CF for its
maximum permissible wire lengths.
Wire Gauge Maximum Length
#22 125 feet
#20 200 feet
#18 300 feet
#16 500 feet
3
SWITCH 4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS
POSITION ("—" means "OFF")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2
ONON—ON—ON—ON—ON—ON—ON
3
ON ON — ON ON ON ON — — ON ON — —
4
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
5
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON — — — — — — —
ON
12345
13 14 15 16
C
NC
NO
OFF ON
DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS
AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER
COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH
TB1
4204
TB2
4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG
121110987654321
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
NO
RELAY
3
RELAY
2
RELAY
1
RELAY
4
TYPICAL
(SHOWN "OFF")
EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED
DATA IN
FROM CONTROL
(–) GROUND
DATA OUT
TO CONTROL
(+) 12V
YEL
BLK
GRN
RED
Figure 3-21: 4204 Relay Module
SWITCH 4204CF ADDRESS SETTINGS
POSITION ("—" means "OFF")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2
ON ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON — ON
3
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
4
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
5
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON
12345
OFF ON
13 14 15 16
NC
NC
DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE
ADDRESS AND
ENABLING/DISABLING
TAMPER
COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH
TB1
TB2
4-PIN CONSOLE PLUG
121110987654321
NC
NC
NC
NC
EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED
DATA IN
FROM CONTROL
(–) GROUND
DATA OUT
TO CONTROL
YEL
BLK
GRN
RED (+) 12V; SUPPLIES POWER TO MODULE
CIRCUITRY (INCLUDING NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE RELAY COILS). CURRENT
DRAIN AT 12V IS: 25 mA + (80 mA PER
ACTIVE OUTPUT)
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE AND
CONSOLE DATA OUTPUTS ARE
POWER LIMITED
+
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE B
2K EOLR
#610-7
POLARIZED
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE
+
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE A
2K EOLR
#610-7
}
+
POWER FOR
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE A,
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE B
8-28VDC OR VFW. UP TO 2.4A
DEPENDING ON BELL CURRENT
- ALARM POLARITY
SHOWN
- EACH OUTPUT
PROVIDES
STYLE Y
SUPERVISION
- EACH OUTPUT
RATED 1.2A MAX
- USE
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCES
COMPATIBLE
WITH
NOTIFICATION
APPLIANCE
POWER SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
RATING
Figure 3-22: 4204CF Relay Module
Installing the FSA Modules
The 8-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-8 and
24-zone LED Fire System Annunciator FSA-24 enable a
fire response unit to identify quickly the point/zone of a
fire. These indicators may be used for other functions
as well, such as status indication. A maximum of 4 FSA
modules, in any combination, can be supported.
The FSA module will not operate until the
device address you have set the DIP switches
for is enabled in the control’s
Device
Programming
in the
#93 Menu Mode
.
To install the FSA module, refer to Figure 3-23 and
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Set the FSA’s DIP switches for a device
address from 08 to 23. See the module’s
instructions for the DIP switch table.
Do not use an address being used by another
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).
2 Mount the FSA module horizontally to a
duplex box (quad box for FSA-24).
3 Connect the module to the control’s keypad
terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9).
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-15
00000
ECP Bus
Dip Switch
Optional
Keyswitch
Connection
SIDE
VIEW
All Switches shown
in Up position.
(ECP Address 23)
Terminal
Block
Connect to
Keypad
Terminals
Figure 3-23: Wiring the FSA Module
Installing 4101SN Relay Modules
The 4101SN V-Plex Single Output Relay Module is a
serial number polling loop output device. The 4101SN
features the following:
Form C relay contacts rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC
with contact supervision.
The position of the relay is supervised, but not
the actual external contact wiring.
One class B/style B EOLR-supervised auxiliary
input zone.
Operating power and communication with control
panels via the V-Plex polling loop.
Electronics mounted in a small plastic case with
tamper-protected cover.
Connect the device to the polling loop, terminals 24 (+)
and 25 (-). Be sure to observe polarity
Installing the 4300 Transformer
Powerline Carrier devices are controlled by signals sent
through the premises’ electrical wiring via a 4300
transformer. If you are using Powerline Carrier
devices, a 4300 transformer must be used in place of
the regular system transformer.
Powerline Carrier devices respond to “on” and “off”
commands sent from the panel through the 4300
transformer.
Powerline Carrier devices (such as X-10, ACT, Leviton)
are either plugged into standard AC outlets or wired
into the AC electrical system by a licensed electrician,
depending on the type of device used.
Note each device’s House and Unit Code
setup, as these codes will be used to program
the devices in
Output Programming
in
#93
Menu Mode
described in the
Programming
Guide
.
To connect the 4300 transformer, see Connecting the
Transformer, later in this section.
Installing the Ground Start Module
UL The Ground Start Module is not intended for
use in UL Listed applications.
Output 1 may be used to trigger an optional 675
Ground Start Module for installations having telephone
lines that require ground start instead of loop start
operation to obtain a dial tone from the telco central
office.
When the panel has a message to transmit to the
central station, it seizes the line, goes off hook, and
then triggers the 675 Module to connect the RING side
of the telephone line to earth ground. The panel causes
the module to break the connection between RING and
earth ground when it obtains a dial tone.
To install the 675 Ground Start Module, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Determine which side of the telephone line
is the RING side by connecting the (+) lead
of a DC voltmeter to earth ground, and the
(-) lead to one side of the telephone line.
The wire that reads + 50VDC is the
RING side.
2 Connect the 675 Ground Start Module to
the panel’s J7 connector trigger output 1, to
auxiliary power, and to the RING side of
the telephone line as shown in Figure 3-24.
3 Program field 146 Auxiliary Output
Enable with a [0].
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-16
You cannot use Output 1 for the Ground Start if
you are using it for a Smoke Detector Reset or
an AAV module.
Ground Start Module Connections
123456789
4142TR
CABLE GRAY (GROUND)
YELLOW (OUT 1)
RED (OUT 2)
GREEN (GROUND)
BROWN (OUT 3)
BLUE (GROUND)
BLACK (OUT 4)
WHITE (GROUND)
J7 CONNECTOR
N/U
IF USED:
1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER
USABLE FOR SMOKE DETECTOR RESET
(SEE FIELD 1*46).
2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE
USED TO PROVIDE ALARM
STATUS INDICATIONS OR
TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH
(SEE FIELD *15).
3. THE 675 IS NOT UL LISTED.
BROWN
GROUND START
TRIGGER
BLUE
GREEN
BLACK
VIOLET
TO AUX. POWER
TERM. 7
TO AUX. POWER
TERM. 6
(50mA CURRENT DRAW)
675
GROUND
START
MODULE
(CUT ORANGE
JUMPER)
TO
TELCO
RING
TO
EARTH
GROUND
Figure 3-24: Ground Start Module Connections
Installing a Remote Keyswitch
A UL-Listed remote keyswitch, such as the ADEMCO
4146, can be used for remote arming/disarming of the
burglary portion of the system and for silencing alarms.
The keyswitch can operate in only one particular
partition.
The keyswitch is wired across zone 7. This zone is no
longer available as a protection zone. Be sure to
program Zone 7 with a response type (e.g., type 10).
Operation
A momentary short across zone 7 arms the
partition in the AWAY mode, and a short held for
more than 10 seconds arms the partition in STAY
mode 1. A subsequent short disarms the partition.
The keyswitch LEDs indicate the partition’s status
(see table below).
A momentary short across Zone 7 silences alarm
bell and keypad sounds, and disarms the system if
it was armed. A subsequent short across Zone 7
clears the alarm memory indication and resets 2-
wire smoke and glassbreak detectors (if used).
LED Indications
Green Red Indication
On Off Disarmed & Ready
Off Off Disarmed & Not Ready
Off On Steady Armed Away
Off Slow Flash Armed Stay
Off Rapid Flash Alarm Memory
The keyswitch reports as user 0, if Open/Close
reporting is enabled in field 40.
Keyswitch Tamper Operation
The tamper switch need not be used for fire or UL
Household Burglary installations. For UL Commercial
Burglary installations, the tamper switch must be
wired to a zone (zone 6 in Figure 3-25).
Program that zone for Day Trouble/Night Alarm
(response type 5). When the keyswitch is removed from
the wall, the tamper switch opens, causing an alarm or
trouble on the zone. This also causes the control to
disable keyswitch operation until the tamper is
restored and the associated partition is disarmed.
Wiring for the Remote Keyswitch
To install the ADEMCO 4146 keyswitch, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect the ADEMCO 4146 to the panel as
shown in Figure 3-25.
2 If you are using the tamper, make sure it is
connected to a zone.
2K ELOR
2K ELOR
TAMPER SWITCH
(CONTACTS CLOSE WHEN
SWITCH DEPRESSED).
LOCK SWITCH
(NORMALLY OPEN)
+
TO J7 / OUT 2
TO J7 / OUT 4
TO AUX POWER
(TERMINAL 6)
ZONE
ZONE
TO ZONE 7 (+)
(TERMINAL 20)
YELLOW WHITE
GREEN
(READY)
RED
(ARMED)
RED BLACK
820
ohms
820
ohms
J7_keyswitch
Figure 3-25: Remote Keyswitch Wiring
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-17
Smoke Detector Reset
Output 1 may be used to reset 4-wire smoke detectors.
Use this output to trigger a low current relay, and wire
the power for the smoke detectors through the relay’s
contacts.
NOTE: The output is normally high (12VDC) and goes
low when the User Code + Off is entered at the keypad.
To install a relay for smoke detector reset, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect power terminals of the relay to the
panel’s auxiliary power (terminals 6 & 7).
2 Connect trigger input of the relay to Output 1
on J7.
3 Connect the “pole” (common) of the relay to
terminal 6 of the control.
4 Connect the positive side of the smoke
detectors to the normally closed contact of the
relay.
5 Connect the negative side of the smoke
detectors to terminal 7 of the control.
Remote Keypad Sounder
This feature is available in the VISTA-128BP only.
An optional Amseco PAL 328N Piezo Sounder can be
used to duplicate the sounds produced by the keypad's
built-in sounder. The panel will remote all sounds (e.g.,
alarm, trouble, chime, entry/exit, etc.) produced by the
keypad's built-in sounder except for the short beeps
associated with keypad key depression. One
application of this feature might be to produce chime
sounds at a distant location from the panel's keypads.
Remote Keypad Sounder Setup
To setup for a remote keypad sounder, connect the
piezo sounder to the panel’s positive auxiliary power
output and to Output 1 on the J7 connector as shown in
Figure 3-26.
Program field 146 Auxiliary Output Enable with a [2].
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GRAY (GROUND)
YELLOW (OUT 1)
WHITE (GROUND)
RED (OUT 2)
GREEN (GROUND)
BROWN (OUT 3)
BLUE (GROUND)
BLACK (OUT 4)
J7 CONNECTOR
IF USED.
1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER
USABLE FOR SMOKE
DETECTOR RESET
OR GROUND START
(SEE FIELD 1*46).
2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE
USED TO PROVIDE ALARM
STATUS INDICATIONS OR
TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH
(SEE FIELD *15).
N/U
4142TR CABLE
BLACK
AMSECO PAL-328N
PIEZO SOUNDER
+
RED
TO AUX POWER +
TERMINAL 6
10mA CURRENT DRAIN)
J7_trigcon-001-V0
Figure 3-26: Remote Keypad Sounder Wiring
Installing the VA8200 Panel Link Module
The VA8200 Panel Link Module (PLM) connects to the
keypad (ECP) terminals on the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-
250BP and also connects to other PLMs via the RS-485
bus (3-wire twisted cable run). Figure 3-27 is a block
diagram of a panel linking setup using three control
panels.
UL Panel Linking is not permitted in UL
installations.
CONTROL
PANEL
CONSOLE
PLM
CONTROL
PANEL
CONSOLE
PLM
CONTROL
PANEL
CONSOLE PLM
ECP
ECP
ECP
RS-485
PLG-001-V0
Figure 3-27: Panel Linking Block Diagram
ECP Wire Run Limitations
Determine wire gauge by referring to the table below.
Wire Run Length Table
Wire Gauge Length
#22 gauge 450 feet
#20 gauge 700 feet
#18 gauge 1100 feet
#16 gauge 1750 feet
The length of the ECP wire runs combined
must not exceed 2000 feet when unshielded
cable is used (1000 feet if unshielded cable is
run in conduit or if shielded cable is used).
If more than one ECP device is wired to a
single run, then the above maximum lengths
must be divided by the number of devices on
the run (e.g., the maximum length is 225 feet
if two keypads are wired on a #22 gauge run).
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-18
RS-485 Bus Wire Run Limitations
The RS-485 bus from the first Panel Linking Module to
the last Panel Linking Module cannot exceed 4000 feet,
using 16-AWG twisted-pair cable.
The recommended form of wiring is to daisy chain the
connection from one unit to another. If several
buildings are to be connected, the RS-485 bus should
form a continuous path from one building to the next.
Avoid wiring units in a star configuration, where
multiple branches are formed. Star configurations
create loading and capacitance problems that are
complex, and become difficult to troubleshoot.
Mounting and Wiring the Panel Link Module
The PLM will not operate until the device is
enabled in the control’s
Device
Programming
in
#93 Menu Mode
.
Do not mount the PLM on the cabinet door
or attempt to attach it to the PC board.
To mount and wire the Panel Link Module, refer to
Figure 3-28 and perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Remove all power from the control panel
before making any wiring connections.
2 Mount the module in the control cabinet if
space is available or, adjacent to the cabinet,
using 2-faced adhesive tape.
3 Set the PLM’s DIP switches for a device
address between 01 and 30. See the module’s
instructions for the DIP switch table.
Do not use an address being used by another
device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.).
4 Connect the 12V (+) and (–) and data-out and
data-in connections from the PLM to the
control’s keypads terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9),
respectively.
5 Connect the 3-wire RS-485 cable between
each PLM. Recommended wiring is to bring
the wires “in” from one module (or control
panel) to terminals 5 (+), 6 (-), and 7 (G) and
“out” to the next module from terminals TB1-
8 (+), 9 (-), and 10 (G).
+
_
G
+
_
G
+
_
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PLG-002-V0
RS-485
RS-485
EOL
JUMPER
PINS
PIEZO
SOUNDER
TAMPER
REED
SWITCH
DIP
SWITCH
ECP IN
ECP OUT
Figure 3-28: VA8200 Panel Link Module Wiring
Long Range Radio Connected to the J7 Triggers
These triggers may be used to trip auxiliary alarm
signaling equipment such as ADEMCO’s 7720,
7720ULF, and 7920SE Long Range Radios.
The triggers are common to all partitions and must be
enabled for each partition (field 220).
The fire and burglary/audible panic alarm triggers are
normally LOW and go HIGH until a User Code + OFF
is entered in all enabled partition(s) that display these
conditions.
The silent panic/duress trigger latches HIGH, except
for duress, which is momentary.
Refer to the installation instructions that accompany
your radio for the connections to the control panel.
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-19
Long Range Radio Connected to the ECP
The control can support an ECP Long Range Radio
(LRR) (7820, 7835C, and 7845C are supported) that
connects to control panel’s keypad terminals. All
messages programmed for transmission via the phone
lines may also be sent via the LRR. These messages
are transmitted in Contact ID format regardless of the
format programmed for the control in fields 45 and 47.
We recommend that, if possible, you use
Contact ID for the main dialer. If Contact ID is
not used, certain types of reports are not sent.
Operation
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP features Dynamic
Signaling Delay and Dynamic Signaling Priority
message reporting when Long Range Radio is used.
These message outputs are accessed through data fields
56 and 57, respectively. The Dynamic Signaling
feature is designed to reduce the number of redundant
reports sent to the central station.
The feature is described as follows:
Dynamic Signaling Delay (Field 56)
Select the time the panel should wait for
acknowledgment from the first reporting destination
before it attempts to send a message to the second
destination. Delays can be selected from 0 to 225
seconds, in 15-second increments.
Dynamic Signaling Priority (Field 57)
Select the initial reporting destination for messages,
Primary Dialer (0) or Long Range Radio (1).
The chart below provides an explanation of how the
Dynamic Signaling feature functions.
If Priority
(57)
is…
And message is… Then…
Acknowledged
before delay
expires
Message is removed
from queue and no
message is sent to LRR.
Primary
Phone
No. ("0")
Not acknowledged
before delay
expires
Message is sent to both
the Primary Phone No.
and LRR.
Acknowledged
before delay
expires
Message is removed
from queue and no
message is sent to
Primary Phone No.
Long
Range
Radio
("1") Not acknowledged
before delay
expires
Message is sent to both
the Primary Phone No.
and LRR.
Additional LRR reporting options are defined by
selecting the events for each subscriber ID in fields 58
and 59. The reporting events are Alarms, Troubles,
Bypasses, Openings/Closing, System Events, and Test.
Also, within an enabled category, the specific event
must be enabled for dialer reporting. If, for instance,
zone 10 is enabled to report, but zone 11 is not, zone 10
will report via the LRR, but Zone 11 will not.
Messages are transmitted from the VISTA-
128BP/VISTA-250BP to the LRR on a “first in/first out”
basis. If events occur at the same time, they are
transmitted in order of priority. The priority from most
to least important is : Fire Alarms, Panic Alarms,
Burglary Alarms, Fire Troubles, Non-Fire Troubles,
Bypasses, Openings/Closings, Test messages, and all
other types of reports.
There are two subscriber IDs programmed into the
LRR: primary and secondary. These correspond to the
two subscriber ID’s programmed into the control for
each partition. If a subscriber ID for a partition is not
programmed (disabling reports to that central station),
the events enabled for the corresponding subscriber ID
in the LRR will not be transmitted.
If the event is to be reported to both phone numbers
(dual reporting), then reporting through the LRR will
be done in an alternating sequence. The first event in
the queue is transmitted to both the primary and the
secondary radio central stations before transmitting the
second event.
If split reporting is selected for the VISTA-
128BP/VISTA-250BP, then the LRR will send the
appropriate reports to the primary and secondary
central stations.
Installing the ECP LRR
To install the ECP LRR, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the radio according to the
instructions that accompany the radio.
2 Connect the data in/out terminals and
voltage input terminals of the radio to the
control’s keypad connection points,
terminals 6, 7, 8, and 9. See Figure 3-29.
RED
BLACK
GREEN
YELLOW
CONTROL
TERMINALS
7
8
9
6
ECP RADIO
Figure 3-29: Wiring Long Range Radio to Keypad
Terminals
Supervision
The data lines between the control and the LRR, as
well as certain functions in the radio, can be
supervised.
If communication is lost or a trouble condition occurs,
both the LRR and the control’s dialer can be
programmed to send a Trouble message to the central
station.
NOTE: For complete information, see the Installation
Instructions that accompany the radio.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-20
Trouble Messages
The following messages are displayed on the 6139/6160
when a problem exists on the Long Range Radio:
1. “LRR Battery”: The battery connected to the radio
is low.
2. “PLL out of Lock”: The radio has an internal fault
and cannot transmit any messages.
3. “Early Power Detect”: RF power is detected without
a valid transmission.
4. “Power Unattained”: Full RF power was never
attained.
5. “Frwd. Power Loss”: RF power was not sustained
throughout the transmission.
6. “Antenna Fault”: A problem with the antenna has
been detected.
7. “LRR CRC is bad”: The radio’s EEPROM is corrupt
(the internal CRC is bad).
NOTES:
Items 2 and 3 require factory service.
Items 4 and 5 could be the result of a bad or low
battery.
If the item 6 message appears, check the antenna,
connection and cable; if they are secure, factory service
is required.
All these messages are displayed in conjunction with
the “CHECK 8xx” message, which indicates a trouble
on the address to which the LRR unit is programmed in
the control.
All of these events except Antenna Fault are sent to the
event log and reported to the central station using
Contact ID Event Code 333 (expansion device trouble).
Antenna Fault uses Event Code 357. If the tamper is
tripped on the LRR, it uses Event Code 341 (expansion
device tamper).
Installing the Alpha Pager Module
The VA8201 Alpha Pager Module (APM) is used for the
transmission of alphanumeric messages to a user-
subscribed Paging Service. The APM will dial and can
be programmed to send the information to up to 8
different paging services. In addition, the module can
direct the reports to a parallel or serial printer.
NOTE: The APM is only required for alphanumeric
format. The system sends numeric format messages
directly.
UL The Alpha Pager Module is not permitted in UL
installations.
The types of events (messages) the pager can transmit
are divided into 5 categories: alarms, troubles,
bypasses, openings/closings, and system.
The options for each paging service are:
Paging service phone number
Format (numeric, alphanumeric)
Two Delay Times (numeric format only): the time
between dialing and transmitting of pager ID and
the time between pager ID and event information
Pager ID number (if necessary)
Partition(s) (which partitions the events are
transmitted for)
Types of messages (events) sent. Must be
programmed for the pager to work.
The APM hangs up between each message. Multiple
messages are sent in the order received. If the APM
cannot make contact with the paging service, it retries
up to 10 times.
When using the APM, field 14 must be
programmed for RS232 input (1). Zone 9
can longer be used as a protection zone.
The APM transmits alphanumeric messages
using the TAP protocol. You must check
with the paging service to ensure that they
are using the TAP protocol Rev. 1.8 or
higher.
Paging Service Advisory
If you are setting up the software for the first time,
contact your paging service provider for the following
two pieces of information:
The exact access number to be used with each
receiving device
The correct PIN number for each receiving device.
Pager Formats
The system supports pager formats numeric and
alphanumeric.
Numeric Format
SSSS P EEE ZZ, where:
SSSS The partition’s 4-digit subscriber number (field
32)
P Partition number
EEE 3-digit event code
ZZZ 3-digit zone or user number
NOTE: If any of the digits for the subscriber number
are hex digits (B, C, D, E, F), they will be replaced with
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, respectively, on the pager display.
Numeric Format Event Codes
Event Code
Alarm 333
Trouble 555
Open 444
Close 777
Other 000
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-21
Alphanumeric
PP Date Time EA ZZZ SSSS AD
Where:
PP Partition number (e.g., P1)
Date Date the event occurred (e.g., 03/15/00)
Time Time the event occurred (e.g., 01:16AM)
EA Event alpha descriptor (see APPENDIX D)
ZZZ Zone or user number
SSSS The partition’s 4-digit subscriber number
(in field 32)
AD The zone’s programmed alpha descriptor
If the event is an arming or disarming, a 6-
character descriptor can be sent for the user, if
programmed, instead of the user number. The
descriptor can be programmed only via the
Compass Downloader.
The installer code has a default of INSTLR and
user number 002 has a default of MASTER for
the 6-character descriptor.
Mounting the Alpha Pager Module
The Alpha Pager Module (APM) may be mounted in the
control cabinet if space is available or, if this is not
possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.
Do not mount the Alpha Pager Module on the
cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC
board.
To mount the Alpha Pager Module, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 If you are mounting the Alpha Pager
Module inside the control cabinet, attach it
to the cabinet’s interior surface with 2-faced
adhesive tape.
2 If you are mounting the Alpha Pager
Module outside the cabinet, use the bracket
interface (Ademco Part Number K5350).
Wiring the Alpha Pager Module
The Alpha Pager Module connects via the 4142TR cable
to the J8 connector on the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP.
To wire the Alpha Pager Module, refer to Figure 3-30
and perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect the 4142TR to J8 on the control.
2 Connect the Brown wire of 4142TR to the
Orange wire of the APM.
3 Connect the Green wire of the APM to TB1-
23 of the control panel.
4 Connect the Red and Black wires of the APM
to terminals 6 and 7 (auxiliary power (+) and
(-), respectively) of the control.
5 Connect the APM RJ11 connector labeled
LINE to the handset terminals on the control
panel (terminals 26 and 27).
6 Connect the handset side of telephone line to
APM RJ11 connector labeled PHONE
(Optional) (Brown and Gray wires of Phone
Cord).
7 If you are using a parallel or serial printer,
connect the printer according to the
instructions accompanying the APM.
The serial printer must be configured for a
baud rate of 1200, seven data bits, even parity,
and one stop bit. (7/E/1).
Automation software cannot be used if a serial
printer is used on the system.
VA8201 ALPHA PAGER MODULE
AUX
PWR.
PARALLEL
PRINTER
PARALLEL
OUTPUT SERIAL
OUTPUT
DATA/
POWER
TO PHONE
TO LINE
EARTH
GROUND
HOME AUTOMATION COMPUTER
TIP
RING
RJ31X
JACK
TIP
RING
INCOMING TELCO LINE
ANSWERING
MACHINE
CALLER ID
UNIT
PREMISES
CALLER ID UNIT,
ANSWERING
MACHINE, AND
PHONES
RED
BROWN
GRAY
GREEN
RED
BLACK
GREEN
RED
BLACK
GREEN
AUX
GND.
62627282930237
TIP RING
HANDSET TIP RING
INCOMING
PHONE
CORD
(ZONE 9) BROWN WIRE
FROM 4142 TR
TRIGGER CABLE
SPLICE
VA8201-SOC-V1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8
BROWN
ORANGE
CONTROL PANEL
NOTE
WHEN USING THE VA8201, ZONE 9 CAN NO
LONGER BE USED AS A PROTECTION ZONE.
Figure 3-30: Wiring the Alpha Pager Module
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-22
Access Control Using VistaKey
The VistaKey is a single-door access control module
that, when connected to the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-
250BP, provides access control to the protected
premises. The alarm system can support up to 15
VistaKey modules (15 access points).
DO NOT USE BOTH the VistaKey and a
PassPoint Access Control System on the same
alarm panel.
UL The VistaKey module contains three zones.
These zones should ONLY be used for access
control functions in UL installations. THESE
INPUT ZONES ARE NOT TO BE USED FOR
FIRE AND BURGLARY APPLICATIONS IN UL
INSTALLATIONS.
VistaKey Features
Each VistaKey communicates with the VISTA-
128BP/VISTA-250BP via the V-Plex polling loop.
In the event local power to the VistaKey is lost, the
VistaKey module provides backup monitoring of
the access point door via a built-in V-Plex device
that is powered solely from the polling loop. It is
programmed as a new type of V-Plex device as part
of the control’s V-Plex Device Programming. A
serial number label is affixed to the VistaKey
module for manual entry of its serial number.
The VistaKey supports up to 500 cardholders.
The addition and removal of VistaKey modules
from the system is easily accomplished via the
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP keypad.
All configurable options for each VistaKey are
accomplished via software, firmware, and
nonvolatile memory, eliminating the need for PC
board jumpers. The access point zone number (1-
15) is set via a user-friendly, 16-position rotary
switch.
Each VistaKey provides one open-collector output
trigger (sink 12mA @ 12VDC).
Mounting and Wiring the VistaKey
For detailed instructions on how to install and
program the VistaKey, refer the
Installation and
Setup Guide
that accompanies the VistaKey-SK.
To mount and wire the VistaKey module, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the VistaKey, door strike or mag lock,
and card reader.
2 Mount the door status monitor (DSM) and/or
request-to-exit (RTE) devices.
3 Using
Figure 3-31 as a reference, connect the
card reader interface cable to TB3, making the
+5V or +12V connection last.
4 Connect the leads to TB1 in the following
order:
a. All ground leads to terminals 2, 5, and 9.
b. The DSM, (optional) RTE, and General
Purpose leads to terminals 6, 7, and 8,
respectively.
c. Door strike (or mag lock) lead to terminal
10.
d. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to terminal
1.
e. Local +12V or +24V supply lead to the N/C
relay terminal 11 (if a mag lock is being
used), OR to the N/O relay terminal 10 (if a
door strike is being used).
5 Connect the (–) polling loop and (+) polling
loop leads (from the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-
250BP) to terminals 4 and 3, respectively.
6 Set the Address Select switch to the desired
access door number (1-15).
7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each VistaKey
being installed.
Connecting the Card Reader
Lead from Reader Lead Color To VistaKey TB3
Terminal #
Green LED Orange 1
Ground* Black 2
DATA 1 (Clock) White 3
DATA 0 (Data) Green 4
+5VDC† Red† 6
+12VDC† Red† 7
* TB-3 Terminal 5 is also a ground and may be used
instead of terminal 2. Terminals 2 and 5 are a common
ground.
Connect to +5VDC OR +12VDC per reader
manufacturer’s specification.
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-23
+
WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED
TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION
OF THIS SYSTEM.
POLE Door Strike/Mag Coil
DATA 1 (WHITE)
DATA 0 (GREEN)
NOTE 1: USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS.
NOTE 2: VISTAKEY TB3 TERMINAL 5 IS A GROUND AND MAY BE
USED INSTEAD OF TB3 TERMINAL 2. TB3 TERMINALS 2 AND 5 ARE
A COMMON GROUND.
NOTE 3: WHEN USING TRIGGER TO TURN ON AN LED OR BUZZER,
RETURN HIGH SIDE OF LED OR BUZZER TO TB3 TERMINAL 7.
TRIGGER RATING IS 15mA AT 12VDC.
+5V
GND
TRIGGER (SEE NOTE 3)
+12V (RED)
ZONE C (General)
ZONE A (DSM)
ZONE B (RTE)
POLLING LOOP -
14V MAX (12V @ 85-160mA Nominal)
POLLING LOOP +
GND
GND
GND
N/O DOOR STRIKE POWER
N/C MAG COIL POWER
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
111223456789101RELAY CONTACT RATINGS:
3A @ 28VDC MAX. (RESISTIVE LOAD)
TB 1
TB 3
1
READER INTERFACE CABLE
GND (BLACK)
RDR LED (ORANGE)
TO ALARM SYSTEM
CONTROL PANEL
POLLING LOOP TERMINALS.
NO
CONNECTION
VISTAKEY
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 CLASS A
LIMITS OF FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) IT MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE.
(2) IT MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE THAT
MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
K1
DOOR
CONTROL
RELAY
FOR ADDITIONAL RATINGS AND
SPECIFICATIONS, REFER TO
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION
FOR THE VISTAKEY-SK.
THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S STANDARDS 70 &
74 (NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOC.,
BATTERYMARCH PARK, QUINCY, MA. 02269).
PRINTED INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING AND
REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE PROVIDED WITH
THIS EQUIPMENT.
TO TB1, 11 OR 12
+ 12 VDC TO ONLY
ONE OF THESE INPUTS.
(FROM TB1-1)
Figure 3-31: Wiring the VistaKey
Access Control Using the PassPoint Access Control System
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP interfaces with the
PassPoint ACS via the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM).
The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad
terminals) of the control and the network bus of the
PassPoint ACS.
The control sends the VGM its status information,
event log entries, and entry/exit requests (inputs
programmed with response type Access Point) from
keypads, hardwired zones, and RF transmitters.
The VGM then reformats and retransmits this
information to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on the
PassPoint ACS network bus.
UL Interfacing the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP with
the PassPoint Access Control System via the
VISTA Gateway Module is not permissible for
UL installations.
Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module
The VISTA Gateway Module is connected between the
ECP bus (VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP keypad
terminals) and the network bus of the PassPoint Access
Control System. See Figure 3-32 for the proper wiring
connections.
}
ECHELON NETWORK
(PASSPOINT ACS)
YELLOW
RED
BLACK
PROM C
TRANSFORMER
4-PIN
KEYPAD
PLUG
}
TO
CONTROL’S
KEYPAD
TERMINALS
GREEN
Figure 3-32: Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module
Event Log Connections
This system has the ability to record up to 1000 events
of various categories in the Event Log (history log).
Each event is recorded with the time and date of its
occurrence (if real-time clock is set). The categories are
Alarm, Supervisory/Check, Bypass, Open/Close, and
System conditions.
The log may be viewed on an alpha keypad, or printed
on a parallel or serial printer.
NOTE: If you are using a parallel printer you must use
the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module.
Printer Configurations
Configure the serial printer as follows:
7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
1200 baud
When using a printer, field 14 must be
programmed for RS232 input (1). Zone 9
can longer be used as a protection zone.
If you are using a serial printer, terminal 23
on the control panel cannot be used to
interface with Automation software
.
Using the Alpha Pager Module (APM)
To connect a printer using the Alpha Pager Module,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect the APM to the control (see
Installing the Alpha Pager Module previously
in this section).
2 Connect the printer according to the
instructions that accompany the APM.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-24
Using the 4100SM
To connect a serial printer using the 4100SM, refer to
Figure 3-33and perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect terminal 23 on the control panel to
terminal 3 on the 4100SM.
2 Connect terminal 6 on the 4100SM to the
Brown wire on the 4142TR cable.
3 Connect the 4142TR cable to J8 on the
control.
4 Connect terminals 8 and 7 of the 4100SM to
terminals 6 and 7 (aux. power (+) and (-)),
respectively of the control.
5 Connect the UL EDP Listed serial printer to
the 4100SM Interface Module.
The 4100SM Module is supplied with a 10-
foot RS232 cable. A longer cable can be used
if the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP is
separated from the serial printer by more
than 10 feet, but the total cable length should
be less than 50 feet.
123456789
NU
J8 CONNECTOR
VIOLET
GREY
YELLOW
RED
GREEN
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
IN 2
IN 3
GROUND
OUT 5
OUT 6
GROUND
GROUND
PRINTER DTR
4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4100SM SERIAL MODULE
+ PWR
- (GND)
RXD
not used
not used
TXD
not used
DTR
BLUE WHITE
To TB6 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB7 Aux. Power (-)
USE GENDER CHANGER
SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM
IF PRINTER HAS DB25
MALE CONNECTOR
3M
Cable
Supplied with
4100SM
SERIAL PRINTER
SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS
EVEN PARITY
STOP BIT
300/1200 BAUD
4100SM JUMPERS
(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)
COLOR FUNCTION PIN #
RED
BLUE
WHITE
CD
CTS
DSR
8
5
6
RED
4100SM-011-V0
Figure 3-33: Printer Connections to the 4100SM
NOTE: See the 4100SM Installation Instructions for
details concerning the serial printer operation.
Installing the 4285/4286 VIP Module
The 4285/4286 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that
permits the user to access the security system (and
relays) via a TouchTone telephone. This may be done
either from the premises or by calling the premises
from a remote location. Only one VIP Module can be
used in a security system. This module must be
enabled as Device Address 4 in the Device
Programming in #93 Menu Mode, and must be assigned
to a partition.
UL The 4285/4286 VIP Module is not permitted in
UL installations.
Detailed operating instructions for phone access
to the security system are provided with the VIP
Module.
The 4285/4286 VIP Module features:
Allows the user to receive synthesized voice
messages over the phone regarding the status of
the security system.
Allows the user to arm and disarm the security
system and perform most other commands using
the telephone keypad.
Allows the user to control relays using the
telephone keypad.
Provides voice annunciation over the phone to
confirm any command that is entered.
Announces many of the same words that would
normally be displayed on an alpha keypad under
the same system conditions. Refer to the words in
bold on the Alpha Vocabulary list found in the #93
Menu Mode in the Programming Guide.
Can be supervised for connection to control panel
(annunciated and reported as Zone 804).
The 4285/4286 is wired between the control panel and
the premises’ handset(s) (see Figure 3-36). It listens for
TouchTones on the phone line and reports them to the
control panel. During on-premises phone access, it
powers the premises phones. During off-premises phone
access, it seizes the line from the premises phones and
any answering machines.
The VIP module will not operate until the
device address (04) is enabled in the control’s
Device Programming
in
#93 Menu Mode
.
Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet
door or attempt to attach it to the PC board.
To install the VIP module, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the module in the control cabinet if
space is available or, if this is not possible, on
the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.
If you mount the VIP Module inside the
control cabinet, attach it to the cabinet’s
interior surface with 2-faced adhesive tape.
You may leave the module’s cover off if it is
mounted within the cabinet.
If you mount the module outside the
cabinet, use the screw holes at the rear to
mount horizontally or vertically (2-faced
adhesive tape may be used, if preferred).
2 Affix the 4285/4286 connections label
(supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP
Module’s cover, if the cover is used.
Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of the
control cabinet’s door.
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-25
Step Action
3 Make 12V (+) and (–) and data-in and data-
out connections from the VIP Module to the
control, using the connector cable supplied
with the VIP Module. These are the same
connections as for remote keypads.
Connect the module to the phone line as
shown below. See Figure 3-34.
4285/4286 Terminal Connects to:
1. Phone In (Tip) green wire of direct-
connect cord
2. Phone In (Ring) red wire of direct-
connect cord
3. Phone Out (Tip) brown wire of direct-
connect cord
4. Phone Out (Ring) gray wire of direct-
connect cord
5. No Connection
6. Audio Out 1 Speaker
7. Audio Out 1 Speaker
Supported by the 4286 only
4
Use an RJ31X Jack with the phone cable
supplied with the control to make connections
to the VIP module. Make connections exactly
as shown in Figure 3-34. This is essential,
even if the system is not connected to a
central station. The 4285/4286 will not
function if this is not done.
If touch-tones are not present following phone
access to the security system
via an on-
premises phone
, try reversing the pair of
wires connected to terminals 3 and 4 on the
4285/4286.
If the phone plug is disconnected from the
control, the premise’s phones will not
operate.
YELLOW
NO CONNECTION
RED
BLACK
GREEN
TO CONTROL PANEL
KEYPAD CONNECTIONS
KEYED
HEADER
123456 7
NO
CONNECTION
4286 VIP MODULE
ANSWERING
MACHINE
PREMISES
ANSWERING
MACHINE AND
PHONES
TIP
RING
RJ31X
JACK
TIP
RING
INCOMING TELCO LINE
CALLER ID
UNIT
IMPORTANT NOTE FOR EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:
EXISTING WIRES CONNECTED TO THE “HANDSET”
TERMINALS ON CONTROL MUST BE MOVED FROM
THERE TO TERMINALS 3 AND 4 ON THE 4286.
U.S. PATENT No. 4791658
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
FCC REGISTRATION No. AC3USA-74659-KX-N
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 1.0B
FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION, SEE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS N6431-3 ACCOMPANYING 4286 VIP
MODULE
GREY
BROWN
GREEN
RED
EARTH
GROUND
TIP RING TIP RING
4500
THERMOSTAT
GREEN
YELLOW
HANDSET INCOMING
TELCO LINE
NOTE:
4286 DEVICE
ADDRESS IS
FACTORY SET
TO “4”
SEE SPEAKER NOTE
SPEAKER NOTE: IF CONNECTING SINGLE SPEAKER, USE 8-ohm SPEAKER ONLY.
IF CONNECTING 2 SPEAKERS, USE 4-ohm or 8-ohm SPEAKERS
AND CONNECT IN SERIES.
SPEAKER
VOLUME
CONTROL
4286_wiring-002-V1
Figure 3-34: 4285/4286 VIP Module Connections
Installing the Audio Alarm Verification Module
UL Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) is not permitted
in UL installations.
685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or
higher. Earlier versions will not hold the
phone line connection.
Contact ID code for “Listen-in to Follow” is
606. Contact ID is the only reporting format
that will send a “Listen-in to Follow.”
If you are also using a 4285/4286 VIP Module,
be sure to follow
Figure 3-37
when making
connections.
To install the Eagle 1250 AAV module to the control,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Mount the module in the control cabinet if
space is available or, if this is not possible,
on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it.
Step Action
2 Connect the Eagle 1250 Module terminals 7
and 8 to the control’s zone 5 terminals 16
and 17.
The purpose of this connection is to
silence and restore the sounders at the
premises. It is also used to postpone
noncritical dialer reports while the
AAV session is in progress.
3 Program zone 5 with a response type (e.g.,
10 Interior w/Delay). Field 160 must be
enabled to silence sounders on the premises.
Zone 5 is no longer available as a
protection zone.
4 Connect the AAV module’s falling-edge
trigger input (terminal 5 on Eagle model
1250) to the J7 connector trigger output, or
to a 4204 relay module, as shown in Figure
3-35, Figure 3-36, and Figure 3-37.
If you are using the 4204, program the
start and stop system operation as 60
for the relay, in Output Programming
in the #93 Menu Mode.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-26
If the phone plug is disconnected from the
control, the premise’s phones will not operate.
NOTES:
When the AAV indicates that the audio alarm
verification session is completed, all keypad sounds
are restored. Sirens are restored if the alarm
timeout period has not expired.
As part of its fail-safe software, the control limits
all audio alarm verification sessions to 15 minutes.
This is because once the session begins, the AAV
Module controls the duration.
If a new Fire alarm should occur during a session,
the control breaks the phone connection and sends
the new Fire Alarm report, then re-triggers the
AAV Mode. All other dialer messages triggered
during ongoing conversation are held until either
the AAV Module signals that it is inactive, or the
15-minute timeout occurs.
Figure 3-35: AAV Connections to J7 Trigger
CONTROL/
DIALER HEADER
NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.
EAGLE
1250
6716 17 27
26 28 29 30
}
ZONE 5
(–) (+)
J7
DIP Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
CONTROL
EARTH
GROUND
RED (R)
GREEN (T)
GREY (R)
BROWN (T)
INCOMING
PHONE LINE
RJ31X
YELLOW
RED
BROWN
BROWN (–)
RED (+)
TIP
RING
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE
13
14
15
16
V+
GND
4204
RELAY 1
SHOWN
OFF
NO NC C
TO PREMISES
HANDSET
Figure 3-36: AAV Connections to 4204 Relay
Module
CONTROL/
DIALER HEADER
NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.
EAGLE
1250
67
16 17 27
26 28 29 30
}
ZONE 5
(–) (+)
(–)(+)
J7
DIP Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
CONTROL
EARTH
GROUND
RED (R)
GREEN (T)
RJ31X
(–) EDGE TRIGGER (YELLOW) PIN 3
SYSTEM POWER (RED)
SYSTEM GROUND (BROWN)
BROWN (–)
RED (+)
TIP
RING
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE
4286
4 3 2 1
BROWN (T)
TO PREMISES
HANDSET
GREY (R)
INCOMING
PHONE
LINE
DIODE FROM
EOLR PACKAGE
Figure 3-37: AAV and 4286 VIP Module
Connections to the J7 Trigger
Installing TeleSmart
The TeleSmart system provides a telephone interface
and message center for an ADEMCO security system. It
has the following features:
4 unique mailboxes for storing messages
6 user access codes
Security system interface
Memo feature for leaving messages for other users
Caller ID capabilities for up to 25 phone numbers
Memory (speed) dialing for up to 15 phone numbers
Repeat dialing (automatically redials busy
numbers)
Last number redial
Call screening (with and without Caller ID)
Privacy (turns off the ringer)
Remote access of TeleSmart and security system
NOTE: The keypad connected to the TeleSmart module
must be the 6139T.
UL TeleSmart is not permitted in UL installations.
Mounting the Telesmart Module
The TeleSmart Module should be mounted in the
security system’s control cabinet if space is available, or
within a grounded metal enclosure to provide proper
ESD protection.
Mounting Inside the Control’s Cabinet: Use
double-sided tape to attach the module to the interior
surface of the cabinet, or hang it on two screws. Do not
mount it on the cabinet door or attach it to the control’s
PC board.
Mounting Outside the Cabinet: Use the screw
holes at the rear of the module. Wires can be brought
out from the side or back (use the round breakout on
the back).
Affix the Summary of Connections label to the module’s
inside cover or to the inside of the cabinet door.
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-27
Wiring Connections
Before making connections, power down the
control panel.
To wire the TeleSmart, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Use a standard RJ31X phone jack (CA38A in
Canada) and direct-connect cord.
Connect the direct-connect cord’s red and
green wires to the control’s incoming phone
line terminals as described in the control’s
instructions. (Figure 3-38)
2 Connect the direct-connect cord’s brown and
gray wires to TeleSmart’s “Home Phones”
terminals, disconnecting them from the
control’s premises phone terminals, if
previously connected.
3 Connect the control’s local phone TIP and
RING terminals to TeleSmart’s “From
Control” terminals, using jumper wires (not
supplied).
4 Connect an 8-Ohm speaker to TeleSmart’s
speaker terminals. (Figure 3-39)
5 Disconnect those keypads intended to be used
with TeleSmart from the control’s terminals,
if previously connected.
Connect keypad wiring as shown in (Figure 3-
40) (see the chart below for the maximum
wire run length for wire gauge you are using).
NOTE: Run audio cable in separate 2-
conductor twisted-pair cable (22AWG
recommended). This cable should be kept at
least 6 inches from other types of cables
carrying potentially interfering signals, such
as AC power, telephone, and polling loop
cables.
WIRE RUN LENGTHS
Gauge 150mA 300mA 500mA 600mA 750mA
22 AWG 160ft 80ft 50ft 42ft 32ft
20 AWG 260mA 130mA 80mA 67mA 52mA
18 AWG 410mA 220mA 130mA 115mA 83mA
16 AWG 650mA 330mA 200mA 170mA 130mA
6
7 Set the keypad address, tamper option, and
playback volume setting by pressing and
holding the [1] and [3] keys at the same time
for 3 seconds, then follows the prompts. You
must press these keys within 60 seconds of
power-up to set the address and/or tamper
option; you can set the volume at any time
after power-up. Refer to the instructions
included with the keypad for additional
details.
You must set TeleSmart keypads to
addresses 0-7 only.
Step Action
8 TeleSmart Plus is powered from the control’s
+12VDC keypad terminal. Connect the
control’s keypad terminals to the TeleSmart
Plus Control terminals as shown. (Figure 3-
42)
IMPORTANT: You must program the
TeleSmart module as device address 24 when
programming the control.
9 This connection is used to drive the
TeleSmart internal clock. Connect either
terminal of the control’s AC input terminals
to the TeleSmart RTC terminal. (Figure 3-41)
10 Connect the TeleSmart ground terminal to a
good earth ground. (Figure 3-41)
TYPICAL
CONTROL’S
PHONE TERMINALS
LOCAL INCOMING
RING
TIP
RING
TIP
RED
GREEN
BROWN
GREY
DIRECT
CONNECT
CORD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
RJ31X
1
2
345
6
7
8
RING
TIP
INCOMING
PHONE LINE
TO
PREMISES PHONES
GREENRED
GREY BROWN
RING
TIP
FROM
CONTROL
HOME
PHONES
phon_conn-V0
Figure 3-38: TeleSmart Phone Connections
NOTE: If the system hangs up the phone line when
calling in from a remote location, check the phone
connection terminals (Term. 17/18 = from control;
Term. 15/16 = to house phones).
8 ohm Speaker
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
AUX
SPEAKER
Figure 3-39: TeleSmart Speaker Connection
IN
OUT
GRN (DATA IN)
RED (+12VDC)
BLACK (–)
YEL (DATA OUT)
USE OUTER
WIRES OF
AUDIO CABLE AUDIO IN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
KEYPADS
KEYPAD
AUDIO
BUS
®
1
OFF
4
MAX
7
INSTANT
READY
2
AWAY
5
TEST
8
CODE
0
3
STAY
6
BYPASS
9
CHIME
#
ARMED
READY
MESSAGE
Figure 3-40: Keypad Connections
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-28
REAL-TIME CLOCK (RTC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
EARTH
GROUND
TYPICAL
CONTROL'S
AC TERMINALS
Figure 3-41: RTC and Ground Connections
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
YEL (DATA OUT)
RED (+12VDC)
GRN (DATA IN)
BLACK (-) GND
TO CONTROL'S
KEYPAD
TERMINALS
Figure 3-42: TeleSmart to Control Connections
Connecting the Transformer
This product uses the 1361 transformer (1361CN in
Canada). If you are using Powerline Carrier devices,
the 4300 transformer interface must be used instead of
the regular 1361 transformer. The 4300 supplies the
control panel with AC, and also sends control pulses
through the premises electrical system to control the
Powerline Carrier devices.
UL Use 1361CN Transformer in Canadian
installations.
Power Limiting Outputs
All outputs are power-limited as per UL985/UL1023.
The following table shows the maximum current that
may be drawn from each output.
Output Maximum Current Draw
Auxiliary Power 750mA
Polling Loop 128mA
Alarm Output 1.7A
For Household Fire or Combination Household
Fire/Burglary Installation: The total current drawn
from the auxiliary power, the polling loop, and the
alarm output combined must not exceed 750mA to
comply with the battery independence requirements in
UL985.
For Household Burglary-Only Installations: The
total current drawn from the alarm output may be up
to 1.7A. A battery must be installed to supply the
current of the combined auxiliary power, polling loop,
and alarm output in excess of 750mA.
Failure to observe the polling loop current
rating will cause polling loop malfunction.
Failure to observe the auxiliary power current
rating will result in a battery that does not
charge properly or possibly a tripped circuit
breaker.
To connect the transformer to the control, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Connect all installed devices to the control.
2 Wire the 1361 Transformer (1361CN in
Canada) to the panel (before connecting the
battery) as shown in Figure 3-43, or wire the
4300 Transformer as shown in Figure 3-44
(if using Powerline Carrier devices).
3 Plug the transformer into a 24-hour,
uninterrupted, 120VAC, 60Hz outlet. After
a few seconds, the keypad display appears.
NO CONNECTION
TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
or 4300, XM10E, or
XF10 if X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED.
Connect to
24hr. source
of AC mains
123
RED (+)BLK (-)
Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH
GEL CELL
BATTERY
CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7 VDC
NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.
BATTERY
TABS
PRIMARY
POWER
Supplied by a
transformer which
is rated at
16.5VAC, 40VA.
Caution must be
taken when wiring
this transformer to
the panel to guard
against blowing the
fuse inside the
transformer (non-
replaceable).
Figure 3-43: 1321 Transformer and Battery
Connections
123456789
GROUND
GROUND
OUT 6
IN 2
GROUND
IN 3
GROUND
OUT 5
J8 CONNECTOR
BLACK
BLUE
BROWN
GREEN
RED
WHITE
YELLOW
GRAY
VIOLET
4142TR CABLE
123456
TB1
-1 TB1
-30 TB1
-2
AC Earth
GroundAC SyncData Com
4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE
Figure 3-44: 4300 Transformer Connections
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-29
Panel Earth Ground Connections
In order for the lightning transient protective devices in
this product to be effective, the designated earth ground
terminal (terminal 30) must be terminated in a good
earth ground. Recommended wire gauge for the ground
connection is #16 AWG, run no farther than 30 feet.
The following are examples of good earth grounds
available at most installations:
Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a noncorrosive
metal strap (copper is recommended) firmly
secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is
electrically connected and secured.
AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-
prong, 120VAC, power outlets only. To test the
integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire
circuit tester with neon lamp indicators, such as
the UL-Listed Ideal Model 61-035, or equivalent,
available at most electrical supply stores.
The panel requires the earth ground
connection for its lightning transient protection
devices.
Determining the Control’s Power Supply Load
Use the tables that follow to calculate the total current
for the Auxiliary Power, the Alarm Output, and the
Polling Loop. In each table, multiply each device’s
standby and/or alarm current by the number of units
used.
1. In Table 1, enter devices used on the polling loop.
Calculate total current draw on the polling loop.
Table 1: Total Polling Loop Current Draw
Polling Loop Device Current # of Units Total
Polling Loop Subtotal
(terminals 24 & 25 – 128mA)
The total current cannot exceed 128mA. If total load exceeds
128mA, then a 4297 Loop Extender Module can be used. This
module is powered from the panel’s auxiliary power, and
provides a separate polling loop output, which can support an
additional 128mA load. Note that the total number of points
connected to the panel cannot exceed 119.
2. In Table 2, enter devices used on Auxiliary Power.
Calculate standby and alarm currents, then add to
get Auxiliary Power current subtotal.
Table 2: Auxiliary Power Current Load
Total Current
Device
Model # Device Current X
# of Units Standby Alarm
Auxiliary Power Subtotal
(terminals 6 & 7 – 750mA max.)
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-30
3. In Table 3, enter devices connected to the Alarm
Output. Calculate alarm currents, then add to get
the Alarm Output current subtotal.
Table 3: Alarm Output Current Load
Total Current
Device
Model # Device Current X
# of Units Standby Alarm
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
Alarm Output Subtotal
(terminals 4 & 5 – 1.7A max.)
4. In Table 4, enter the total calculated subtotals of
all listed outputs from Tables 1 through 3, then
add to get the combined current.
Table 4: Total VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Current
Load
Total Current
Standby Alarm
Polling Loop Subtotal (see Table 1)
Aux. Power Subtotal (see Table 2)
Alarm Output Subtotal (see Table 3)
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP PCB
Current (Includes 2-wire smoke
detector loading on zone 1) 250mA 330mA
Total Current Load
Determining the Size of the Standby Battery
The cabinet supplied with the control panel can house
batteries of up to 12V, 14AH (two 12V, 7AH batteries
wired in parallel). The VISTA-ULKT kit provides a
cabinet that can house batteries of up to 12V, 17.2AH
and that may be used with this panel. The total
standby current drawn from the auxiliary power and
polling loop outputs combined must be limited to
270mA when 14AH batteries are used; and to 390mA
when 17.2AH batteries are used.
DO NOT use Gates batteries (sealed lead-acid
type). These batteries require a different
charging voltage than is supplied by the panel.
UL Household Fire or Combination
Household/Fire/Burglary installations require
the use of a backup battery that is capable of
providing 24 hours of standby time followed by
4 minutes of alarm time. UL1023 Household
Burglary-only installations require the use of a
backup battery that is capable of providing 4
hours of standby time followed by 4 minutes of
alarm time.
Use Table 5 to determine the required backup battery
capacity and use Table 6 to determine the battery
model number. A dual battery harness is supplied
that allows two batteries to be wired in parallel for
increased capacity.
5. Using the total calculated from Table 4, calculate
the battery capacity required for the installation.
Table 5: Battery Capacity Calculation Table
Capacity Formula Calculated
Value
Standby
Capacity For 4-hour standby time:
Total standby current X 4 hours X
1.4 contingency factor.
For 24-hour standby time:
Total standby current X 24 hours
X 1.1 contingency factor.
Alarm
Capacity For 4-, 5-, or 15-minute alarm time:
Total alarm curr. X 0.067 (4 min)
0.250 (15 min)
Total
Capacity Add standby and alarm
capacities
Section 3 - Installing the Control
3-31
6. Use the Battery Selection Table to select the
appropriate battery for the installation.
Table 6: Battery Selection Table
Capacity Recommended Battery Comment
4AH Yuasa NP4-12
7AH Yuasa NP7-12
12AH Yuasa NP12-12 Fits in large
mercantile
cabinet only.
14AH Yuasa NP7-12 Connect two
in parallel.
17.2AH Yuasa NPG18-12 Fits in large
mercantile
cabinet only.
7. Connect the battery, referring to Figure 3-43.
The standby battery is automatically tested for
10 minutes every 4 hours, beginning 4 hours
after exiting Programming mode. In addition,
entry into the Test mode initiates a battery test.
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP also runs a 5-
second battery test every 60 seconds to check
if the battery is connected.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
3-32
4-1
SECTION 4
Programming
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250BP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the
table listing the differences between the VISTA-128BP and the VISTA-250BP control panels.
Program Modes
There are two programming modes for the VISTA-
128BP/VISTA-250BP. These are the Data Field
Program Mode and the #93 Menu Mode. The Data Field
Program Mode is where many system options are
programmed. The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive
mode that requires a 2-line alpha keypad (6139/6160).
The factory-loaded defaults (97) enable
keypad addresses 00-01 only. A keypad set to
one of these addresses must be used to
program the system initially.
Local keypad programming can be disabled
through Compass downloading software. If
this is done, Program mode can only be
accessed via the downloading software.
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode
Enter Programming mode using either method a or b:
a. Press both the [] and [#] keys at the same time
within 30 seconds after power is applied to the
control.
b. Enter the
Installer Code + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0]
keys. The factory installer code can be changed
once in the Program mode (field 00).
NOTE: The default for the Installer Code is 4140.
Exit the Programming mode by either method a or b:
a. Press [] + [9] + [8]. Exiting by this method
prevents the installer code from being used to re-
enter Programming mode. Only method “a” can be
used to re-enter Programming mode.
b. Press [] + [9] + [9]. Exiting by this method
permits the installer code to be being used to re-
enter Programming mode.
Data Field Programming Mode
In the Data Field Program Mode you may access any
field simply by entering either [] or [#] + the field
number:
To write or change information in a field press []
+ the field number (03).
To read the information in a field press [#] + the
field number (#03).
When the entries for a field are completed, the keypad
beeps three times and advances to the next field.
Summary of Data Field Programming Commands
91 Select partition for programming partition-specific fields
92 Display the software revision level of the control panel
93 Enter Menu mode programming
94 Go to next page of fields
99 Go back to previous page of fields or exit
Programming Mode with no installer code lockout
98 Exit Programming Mode with Installer Code lockout
Moving Between Programming Levels
The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred
to as “pages”). The first page is accessed as soon as
Programming Mode is entered.
The second and third pages of data fields are indicated
at the keypad by a 1 and 2, respectively, in front of the
2-digit field address. “ALT PROGRAM MODE” is
displayed along with a “100” or “200,” indicating which
page of program fields is accessed.
To access the next level of programming fields, perform
the following steps:
Step Action
1 Press 94.
2 Press [] + [XX], where XX = the last two
digits of the program field, and make the
desired entry.
NOTES:
Press 94 to move to 2nd page, (fields 101 - 176);
press 99 to move back to 1st page.
Press 94 to move to 3rd page (fields 200 - 288);
press 99 to move back to 2nd page
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
4-2
Entry Errors
If an address is improperly entered, the keypad
displays “FC.”
If a program entry is improperly entered (for
example, a larger number than is permitted), the
keypad display will go blank.
In either of the above cases, simply re-enter [] + the
correct field number and then enter the correct data.
Programming System-Wide Data Fields
Values for some programming fields are system-wide
(global), and some can be different for each partition
(partition-specific).
The partition-specific programming fields are
automatically skipped when programming the
global fields. If the system has only 1 partition,
the partition-specific fields
are not
automatically skipped.
To program system-wide data fields, perform the
following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0 0.
The following display appears:
Program Mode
Fill # View – 00
2 If the control has not been programmed before,
enter 97 to load factory defaults.
3 Press [] and enter the first field number to be
programmed (for example, 00, Installers
Code). Make the desired entry. When the field
is complete, the keypad beeps three times and
advances to the next field. If you do not want
to change the next field, press [] and enter the
next field number to be programmed.
First Page of fields
(00 - 90)
To change to the next page of fields, press 94.
To return to the previous page of fields, press
99.
4 Press 99 or 98 to exit Program Mode.
NOTE: If the number of digits that you enter in a data
field is fewer than the maximum permitted (for
example, a phone number), the keypad displays the last
entry and waits. To proceed, enter [] + the next data
field you wish to program.
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields
To program partition-specific data fields once in
Program Mode, do the following:
Step Action
1 Enter Program Mode: Installer Code + 8 0 0
0.
2 Press 91, which will prompt you for the
partition number desired.
3 Enter a partition-specific field number (e.g.,
09) to begin programming.
When the first field’s entry is completed, the
next partition-specific field is automatically
displayed. When all partition-specific fields
are programmed, the system returns to the
global programming fields (page 1 fields).
4 Repeat this procedure for each partition in
the installation.
NOTE: To return to the global program fields before
finishing all fields, enter any global field number.
Programming Partition-Specific Fields
Press 91 to select a partition.
Enter the partition to be programmed.
Enter a partition-specific field number and make entry.
After partition-specific fields are programmed,
press 91 to select next partition.
Enter any global field number to return to the global
fields at any time.
#93 Menu Mode Programming
The #93 Menu Mode is an interactive mode through
which much of the system’s programming is done. In
this mode, there are “question and answer” prompts
that can be accessed once Data Field Program Mode
has been entered. These prompts require a 2-line alpha
keypad (6139/6160).
After programming all system-related programming
fields in the usual way, press #93 while still in
programming mode to display the first choice of the
menu-driven programming functions. Press 0 (NO) or 1
(YES) in response to the displayed menu selection.
Pressing 0 will display the next choice in sequence.
Section 4 – Programming
4-3
Below is a list of the main menus. For details refer to the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Programming Guide.
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
ZONE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For programming the following:
Zone Number
Zone Response Type
Partition Number for Zone
Dialer report code for zone
Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)
Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 Series transmitters & serial polling loop devices into the system.
Zone Attributes (e.g., Arm w/Fault, Silent, etc.).
EXPERT MODE?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Same as Zone Programming except:
Done with a minimum number of keystrokes.
Can program wireless keys using pre-defined templates.
REPORT CODE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For programming the following:
Alarm report codes for zones
Restore and supervisory codes
All other system report codes
ALPHA PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For entering alpha descriptors for the following:
Zone Descriptors
Installer’s Message
Custom Words
Partition Descriptors
Relay Descriptors
DEVICE PROG?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For defining the following device characteristics for addressable devices, including keypads, RF
receivers (5881), output relay modules (4204/4204CF), FSA (FSA-8/FSA-24), 4285/4286 VIP Module,
Panel Link Module (VA8201), ECP long range radio (7845C), and VISTA Gateway Module:
Device Address
Device Type
Keypad Options (including Partition assignment)
RF House ID
LRR Options (including Programming radio)
OUTPUT PGM?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For defining output device functions.
RLY VOICE DESCR?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For entering voice descriptors for relays to be used with the 4285/4286 VIP Module.
CUSTOM INDEX ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For creating custom word substitutes for VIP Module annunciation.
ACCESS POINT PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For defining the parameters for each of the VistaKey zones, including which group(s) have access
through an access point (door). See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for detailed
programming instructions.
ACCESS GRP PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For defining the capabilities (privileges) for each group of users. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and
Setup Guide for detailed programming instructions.
EVENT/ACTION PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For defining events and time windows for an access group. See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup
Guide for detailed programming instructions.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
4-4
MAIN MENU OPTIONS
SCHEDULED CHK-IN
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
For defining the schedule for the system to automatically call the downloader.
Following is a list of commands used while in the Menu Mode:
#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands
#93 Enters Menu Mode.
[] Serves as [ENTER] key. Press to have keypad accept entry.
[#] Backs up to previous screen.
0 Press to answer NO.
1 Press to answer YES.
00, or 000+[] Quits Menu Mode and goes back to Data Field Programming Mode, if entered at first prompt of each main menu option.
Zone Number Designations
The VISTA-128BP supports up to 128 zones, the
VISTA-250BP supports up to 250 zones, of hardwire,
polling loop and/or wireless protection, distributed
among up to 8 partitions. The following table lists the
zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used
with each, and some alternate functions of the zones.
Zone Function
1 2-wire Smoke Detectors (if used)
5 Audio Alarm Verification (if used)
7 Keyswitch (if used)
8 Latching-Type Glassbreak Detectors (if used)
1-9 Traditional Hardwired Zones
9 RS232 Input (if used)
1-250 5800 Series Wireless Devices
10-250 Polling Loop Devices
995 + 1 Panic
996 # + 3 Panic
999 + # Panic
Zone Defaults
Zone # Zone Type Zone # Zone Type
001 09 601-632 00
002 03 800-830 00
003 03 970 00
004 03 988 00
005 03 990 00
006 03 992 N/A
007 03 995 00
008 03 996 00
009 03 997 05
010–250 00 999 06
NOTE: Zone 992 is the Duress zone. Programming of the
zone response type is not applicable. This zone requires only
the report code programming.
Zone Index
The zones are designated as follows:
ZONE #
RANGE ZONE
FUNCTION ACTUAL ZONE
001 – 250 Protection
zones As indicated
601 – 632 Relay
Supervisory
Zones
6 + 2-digit Relay Number; e.g.,
Relay Number 03, if supervised,
is zone 603.
800 – 830 ECP Device
Supervisory
Zones
8 + 2-digit Device Address;
e.g., Device Address 01, if
supervised, is zone 801.
4285/4286 VIP Module is zone
804 (because its Device
Address must be set to 4).
TeleSmart is zone 824
(because its Device Address
must be set to 24).
970, 988,
990, & 997 System
Supervisory
Zones
970: Bell Supervision
988: 2nd Wireless Receiver –
not receiving signals
990: 1st Wireless Receiver –
not receiving signals
997: Polling Loop (short
circuit)
992, 995 –
999 Duress and
Keypad Panics 992: Duress
995: 1 + panic (A key)
996: 3 + # panic (C key)
999: + # panic (B key)
Supervisory zones should be given a response type of 05
(Trouble by Day, Alarm by Night).
Section 4 – Programming
4-5
Communication Defaults
*45 PRIMARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID
*46 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Prim) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed
*47 SECONDARY FORMAT [1] ADEMCO Contact ID
*48 LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.) [0] ADEMCO Low Speed
*49 CHECKSUM VERIFICATION [0] [0]
No checksum Primary Secondary
*50 SESCOA/RADIONICS SEL. [0] Radionics
*51 DUAL REPORTING [0] no
*52 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard
Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat
*53 STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
[0] [0] [0] [0] [0] [0] standard
Alarm Rstr Bypass Trbl Opn/Cls Low Bat
Communication Defaults for Zones
ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd
1 01 00 50 05 00 99 09 00 148 13 00
2 02 00 51 06 00 100 10 00 149 14 00
3 03 00 52 07 00 101 11 00 150 15 00
4 04 00 53 08 00 102 12 00 151 01 00
5 05 00 54 09 00 103 13 00 152 02 00
6 06 00 55 10 00 104 14 00 153 03 00
7 07 00 56 11 00 105 15 00 154 04 00
8 08 00 57 12 00 106 01 00 155 05 00
9 09 00 58 13 00 107 02 00 156 06 00
10 10 00 59 14 00 108 03 00 157 07 00
11 11 00 60 15 00 109 04 00 158 08 00
12 12 00 61 01 00 110 05 00 159 09 00
13 13 00 62 02 00 111 06 00 160 10 00
14 14 00 63 03 00 112 07 00 161 11 00
15 15 00 64 04 00 113 08 00 162 12 00
16 01 00 65 05 00 114 09 00 163 13 00
17 02 00 66 06 00 115 10 00 164 14 00
18 03 00 67 07 00 116 11 00 165 15 00
19 04 00 68 08 00 117 12 00 166 01 00
20 05 00 69 09 00 118 13 00 167 02 00
21 06 00 70 10 00 119 14 00 168 03 00
22 07 00 71 11 00 120 15 00 169 04 00
23 08 00 72 12 00 121 01 00 170 05 00
24 09 00 73 13 00 122 02 00 171 06 00
25 10 00 74 14 00 123 03 00 172 07 00
26 11 00 75 15 00 124 04 00 173 08 00
27 12 00 76 01 00 125 05 00 174 09 00
28 13 00 77 02 00 126 06 00 175 10 00
29 14 00 78 03 00 127 07 00 176 11 00
30 15 00 79 04 00 128 08 00 177 12 00
31 01 00 80 05 00 129 09 00 178 13 00
32 02 00 81 06 00 130 10 00 179 14 00
33 03 00 82 07 00 131 11 00 180 15 00
34 04 00 83 08 00 132 12 00 181 01 00
35 05 00 84 09 00 133 13 00 182 02 00
36 06 00 85 10 00 134 14 00 183 03 00
37 07 00 86 11 00 135 15 00 184 04 00
38 08 00 87 12 00 136 01 00 185 05 00
39 09 00 88 13 00 137 02 00 186 06 00
40 10 00 89 14 00 138 03 00 187 07 00
41 11 00 90 15 00 139 04 00 188 08 00
42 12 00 91 01 00 140 05 00 189 09 00
43 13 00 92 02 00 141 06 00 190 10 00
44 14 00 93 03 00 142 07 00 191 11 00
45 15 00 94 04 00 143 08 00 192 12 00
46 01 00 95 05 00 144 09 00 193 13 00
47 02 00 96 06 00 145 10 00 194 14 00
48 03 00 97 07 00 146 11 00 195 15 00
49 04 00 98 08 00 147 12 00 196 01 00
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
4-6
Communication Defaults for Zones (continued)
ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd ZONE # 1st 2nd
197 02 00 215 05 00 232 07 00 249 09 00
198 03 00 216 06 00 233 08 00 250 10 00
199 04 00 217 07 00 234 09 00 601-632 00 00
200 05 00 218 08 00 235 10 00 800-830 00 00
201 06 00 219 09 00 236 11 00 970 00 00
202 07 00 220 10 00 237 12 00 988 00 00
203 08 00 221 11 00 238 13 00 990 00 00
204 09 00 222 12 00 239 14 00 992 (DURESS) 11 00
205 10 00 223 13 00 240 15 00 995 00 00
206 11 00 224 14 00 241 01 00 996 00 00
207 12 00 225 15 00 242 02 00 997 06 00
208 13 00 226 01 00 243 03 00 999 60 00
209 14 00 227 02 00 244 04 00 ALARM RST. 01 00
210 15 00 228 03 00 245 05 00 TROUBLE 01 00
211 01 00 229 04 00 246 06 00 TRBLE. RST 01 00
212 02 00 230 05 00 247 07 00 BYPASS 00 00
213 03 00 231 06 00 248 08 00 BYP. RST. 00 00
214 04 00
Zone Response Type Definitions
Each zone must be assigned a zone type, which defines
the way in which the system responds to faults in that
zone. There are three keypad-activated zones (panic
keys; see note) for each partition, a polling loop
supervision zone, and four RF supervisory zones, two
for each RF receiver installed. Zone types are defined
below.
Type 00: Zone Not Used
Program with this zone type if the zone is not used.
Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary
Provides entry delay whenever the zone is faulted and
the system is armed in the AWAY or STAY mode.
When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or
MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay is provided. Exit
delay begins whenever the control is armed, regardless
of the arming mode selected. These delays are
programmable.
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for primary
entry to and exit from the facility.
Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary
Provides a secondary entry delay, if the system is
armed in the AWAY or STAY modes and the zone is
faulted. When the panel is armed in the INSTANT or
MAXIMUM mode, no entry delay is provided.
Secondary exit delay begins whenever the control is
armed, regardless of the arming mode selected. These
delays are programmable.
Assign this zone type to zones that are used for entry
and exit of the facility and require more time than the
primary entry and exit point. Delay times for this zone
type must be greater than those for zone type 01 (e.g., a
garage, loading dock, or basement door).
Type 03: Perimeter Burglary
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the
system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or
MAXIMUM mode.
Assign this zone type to all exterior door and window
zones.
Type 04: Interior, Follower
Provides a delayed alarm (using the programmed entry
delay time) if an entry/exit zone is faulted first.
Otherwise it produces an instant alarm. It is active
when the system is armed in the AWAY or MAXIMUM
mode, but the MAXIMUM mode eliminates the entry
delay.
If the Interior Follower zone is programmed for one of
the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is
automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the
STAY or INSTANT mode.
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as
a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass
upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night
Provides an instant alarm if the zone is faulted and the
system is armed in the AWAY, STAY, INSTANT, or
MAXIMUM mode. During the disarmed state (day), the
system annunciates a latched trouble sounding from
the keypad (and a central station report, if desired).
Assign this zone type to a zone that contains a foil-
protected door or window (such as in a store), or to a
zone covering a sensitive area such as a stock room or
drug supply room. It can also be used on a zone in an
area where immediate notification of an entry is
desired.
Type 06: 24-Hour Silent Alarm
Sends a report to the central station but provides no
keypad display or sounding. Assign this zone type to a
zone containing an Emergency button.
Section 4 – Programming
4-7
Type 07: 24-Hour Audible Alarm
Sends a report to the central station and provides an
alarm sound at the keypad and an audible external
alarm. Assign this zone type to a zone containing an
Emergency button.
Type 08: 24-Hour Auxiliary Alarm
Sends a report to central station and provides an alarm
sound at the keypad only. (No bell output is
provided.) Assign this zone type to a zone an
Emergency button or one containing monitoring devices
such as water sensors or temperature sensors.
Type 09: Supervised Fire (Without Verification)
Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble
condition on open circuit. A fire alarm produces a
pulsing of the bell output. A zone of this type is always
active and cannot be bypassed.
Type 10: Interior with Delay
Provides entry and exit delays (using the programmed
entry and exit delay times) when armed in the AWAY
mode. Provides only exit delay when armed in the
MAXIMUM mode (no entry delay).
If the Interior with Delay zone is programmed for one
of the STAY modes (default is STAY mode 1), it is
automatically bypassed when the panel is armed in the
STAY or INSTANT mode. Delay begins whenever
sensors in this zone are violated, regardless of whether
or not an entry/exit delay zone was tripped first.
Assign this zone type to a zone covering an area such as
a foyer, lobby, or hallway through which one must pass
upon entry or exit (to and from the keypad).
Type 14: PLM Supervision
Provides supervision of remote Panel Link Modules. If
the communication between the local PLM and a
remote PLM fails, a trouble message is produced for the
PLM zone.
Type 16: Fire With Verification
Provides a fire alarm on a short circuit and a trouble
condition on open circuit. An initial short detection
causes 7-second smoke detector power reset. A
subsequent short detection within 90 seconds of the
reset causes a fire alarm. A fire alarm produces a
pulsing of the bell output. A zone of this type is always
active and cannot be bypassed.
Type 20: Arm-STAY (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to arm in the STAY mode when the
zone is activated.
Type 21: Arm-AWAY (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to arm in the AWAY mode when the
zone is activated.
Type 22: Disarm (5800 Series devices only)
Causes the system to disarm when the zone is
activated.
Type 23: No Alarm Response
Used on a zone when an output relay action is desired,
but with no accompanying alarm (e.g., for lobby door
access).
Type 27: Access Point
Assign this zone type to an input device (hardwired
zone, wireless zone, keypad, access control relay, etc.)
that controls an access entry point (e.g., a door). The
access point entry relay can be assigned to an access
control relay (controlled by the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-
250BP), ECP relay (4204), or to the access control
system independent of the control panel.
Type 28: Main Logic Board (MLB) Supervision
Used to supervise the MLB. If communication between
the MLB and the VISTA Gateway Module (VGM) fails,
a trouble condition is annunciated for the zone. Also, if
the communication fails, all access control system
(ACS) input zones also display a “CHECK.”
Type 29: Momentary Exit
Used to cause an access point programmed for entry to
revert to an exit point for 15 seconds. After the 15
seconds, it automatically reverts back to an entry point.
This zone type should be used only with VistaKey
modules.
NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share the same
zone response type for all 8 partitions, but panics may be
individually enabled for each partition.
IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION
Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990, and 997) report as
trouble conditions only, and as such, should be assigned zone
type 05 if annunciation is desired. See
Polling Loop Supervision
and
RF System Operation and Supervision
in
SECTION 3
Installing the Control
for more information.
Zone Input Type Definitions
Each zone must be assigned an input type, which
defines the where the system will “look” for status of
the zone (RF receiver, polling loop, etc.). Zone input
types are defined below.
Type 01 Hardwired (HW)
Reserved for the built-in hardwired zones 1-9.
Type 02 RF Motion (RM)
Select for 5800 Series RF transmitters. Sends periodic
check-in signals, as well as fault and low-battery
signals. The control panel automatically restores the
zone to “ready” after a few seconds. This type is
designed for facilities with multiple motion detectors
that may fault and restore simultaneously. The
transmitter must remain within the receiver’s range.
NOTE: If using RF Motion with a door/window type
transmitter, only loop 1 may be used.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
4-8
Type 03 Supervised RF (RF)
Select for 5800 Series RF transmitters that will be
supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter must
remain within the receiver’s range.
Type 04 Unsupervised RF (UR)
Select for 5800 Series RF transmitters that will not be
supervised for check-in signals. The transmitter may
therefore be carried off-premises.
Type 05 Unsupervised Button RF (BR)
Select for 5800 Series RF transmitters specifically
designed for this input type. Check the transmitter’s
instructions for proper programming of the input type.
These transmitters send only fault signals. They do not
send low-battery signals until they are activated. The
transmitter may be carried off-premises.
Type 06 Serial Number Polling Loop (SL)
Select for polling loop devices with a built-in serial
number.
For VistaKey, select this type for Door Status Monitor
Backup DSMB. If local power to the VistaKey is lost, a
V-Plex SIM, located on the VistaKey board, is powered
directly from the polling loop and reports the state of
the DSM via the standard V-Plex polling system.
NOTE: To obtain the DSMB function, the Input Type
must be defined as 06 and the next prompt in Zone
Programming (Access Point) must contain the Access
Point number (01-15) (address of the VistaKey module).
Type 07 DIP Switch Loop (DP)
Select for polling loop devices that use DIP switches for
programming the zone number of the device.
Type 08 Dip Switch Polling Loop Right Loop (PS)
Select for the second loop of two-zone polling loop
devices (e.g., 4190WH; 4278).
Type 09 Console Input (CS)
Select when this zone is to be controlled by a keypad
input (user code + [#] + [7] + [3]) for access control.
Type 10 PassPoint Access Control (ACS)
Select when this zone is mapped to a zone on the
PassPoint Access Control System.
Type11 VistaKey Door Status Monitor (DSM)
Select this input type when using a VistaKey module
connected to a door. This must be programmed for each
VistaKey module to provide the DSM zone mapping a
panel zone. If this is not programmed the panel will not
“see” the VistaKey module.
It is also used to determine the door is opened after a
card swipe or if the door is being held open. The device
is normally a magnetic switch mounted on the door.
The status of the switch is different when the door is in
an open position.
Type 12 VistaKey Request to Exit (RTE)
Use this input type to map an uncommitted RTE zone
to an alarm panel zone. This input type is not normally
used if the zone is used for a request-to-exit function.
Type 13 VistaKey General Purpose (GP)
This input type operates in the same manner as other
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP alarm panel zones and is
provided so that a zone in the proximity of the VistaKey
can be wired without having to run additional wiring
from the control panel.
Programming for Panel Linking
Step Action
1 Program the Panel Link Module (PLM) into
the system in Device Programming in the #93
Menu Mode with Device Type 10.
2 If you want to supervise the PLM,
program zone 8xx with response type 05,
where “xx” = the module’s address. If you want
the zone to report to the central station, make
sure the report code for the zone is set with a
non-zero value.
3 If you want to supervise the PLMs
connected to other controls, program those
modules in Zone Programming with response
type 14. Also, program the panel ID number.
The ID number must match the ID number
programmed in Device Programming of the
control panel the PLM is connected. If you
want the zone to report to the central station,
make sure the report code for the zone is set
with a non-zero value. Be sure to program
the input type with 00.
See Device Programming and Zone Programming in #93
Menu Mode Programming in the Programming Guide
for a detailed explanation of the programming
procedures.
Section 4 – Programming
4-9
Programming for the Alpha Pager Module Programming for TeleSmart
In field 2*30, enter 1 to enable the Alpha Pager
Module.
Program fields 2*31 – 2*88 for the paging service
parameters (see the Programming Guide). The
events (e.g., field 2*39) must be programmed
for the pager to work.
If you have a printer connected to the module,
program field 1*69 with a 0 for a parallel printer or
a 1 for a serial printer.
Additionally, fields 05 and 14 may be programmed
when using the Alpha Pager Module.
Fields for programming the delay times (e.g.
2*36 and 2*37 for pager 1) are relevant only
when using numeric format for the pager.
The TeleSmart module has a fixed address of 24 (it
cannot be changed). Set Device Address 24 in the
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Device Programming
mode for Device Type 11, TeleSmart. Also, Device
Address 23 must be set for Device Type 01, Alpha
Console, but do not actually connect a device to
the control panel set to that address. This must be
done so that TeleSmart can be accessed remotely (off
premises).
Refer to Device Programming in the #93 Menu Mode in
the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Programming Guide
for specific instructions.
Programming for Access Control
VistaKey
See the VistaKey-SK Installation and Setup Guide for
the detailed programming instructions.
VistaKey Dialer Enables
When the VistaKey is installed with an alarm system,
the system defaults are set so that the system does not
send reports to the central station. The programming is
accomplished in field 135 for the following events:
ACS Troubles - To enable or disable ACS trouble
reporting.
ACS Bypasses - To enable or disable ACS bypass
reporting.
ACS System - To enable or disable ACS system
reporting, (i.e., ACS module reset).
ACS Alarms - To enable or disable ACS alarm
reporting.
Dialer (Trace) - To enable or disable access
grant/denial events sent to the central station.
The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for
use as regular VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP hardwired
zones (the zone response type is ACS). The PassPoint
ACS can also utilize the control panel dialer for reports
to the central station.
Using ACS Zone Inputs
If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these
may be used by the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP as
hardwired zones. To program for ACS zone inputs,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.
2 Program this zone as any other zone. Indicate
the input type as ACS (10).
3 Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31)
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
PassPoint Dialer Events
All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the VISTA-
128BP/VISTA-250BP dialer via the VGM. These events
will also be logged into the control’s event log. This is
enabled in the PassPoint ACS. See the PassPoint ACS
documentation for a detailed explanation.
Programming the VISTA Gateway Module
See the PassPoint ACS instructions to program the
VISTA Gateway Module.
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point Using
VistaKey or PassPoint
The control can send entry and exit requests to the
VistaKey or PassPoint ACS utilizing keypads and
button-type (BR) RF transmitters. A zone is
programmed with a response type 27 (Access Point) and
an appropriate input type (console, RF).
Using the Alpha Keypad
Step Action
1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.
2 Program the zone with a response type 27
(Access Point).
3 Enter the access point number (00-31) of the
door.
4 Program whether this is an entry or exit point.
5 Enter the partition number.
6 Enter the input type as CS (09).
7 Enter the keypad ECP address.
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
4-10
Using an RF Transmitter Zone
A button type RF transmitter (5804) can be used to
provide access or egress for up to 4 doors. One button
will control one door. Also, a button can be used to
provide access or egress due to a panic or duress
condition.
An RF transmitter (5816) can be used with a remote
switch to provide exit in case of a fire alarm using a
PassPoint event action. To program the RF transmitter
for access control, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Zone Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.
2 Program the zone with a response type 27
(Access Point).
3 Enter the access point number (00-31) of the
door.
4 Indicate whether RF device is for entry or exit.
5 Enter the partition number
6 Enter the input type: button RF (05).
7 Enter the loop number.
8 Enroll the serial number
See Zone Programming in the Programming Guide for a
detailed explanation.
RF buttons and pendants must be assigned
to a user number in order to function. See
SECTION 9: User Access Codes
for the
procedure.
An RF transmitter will not provide access or
grant if the system is in any test mode.
Using Wireless Keypads
Wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another
way of entering or exiting the premises. They function
the same as alpha keypads, except when the code + #
73 is entered. This entry will allow momentary access
to ALL access points in the partition to which the
keypad is assigned To program the wireless keypad,
enter the partition the keypad is assigned to in field
1*48.
Control of Lighting and Appliances
Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an
access or exit event occurs. Lights or appliances can be
automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or
egress request is presented at an access point. To
control these devices, the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP
relays or the ACS relays or triggers are used with
keypads and/or RF transmitters whose response type is
Access Point (27).
To program the control of lighting and appliances,
perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.
2 Program all the information for the relay.
3 Select the output type: ECP (1) (4204/4204CF)
or (2) (X-10).
See Output Programming in the Programming Guide
for a detailed explanation.
Using the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP for Stand-
Alone Access Control
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP can be used for access
control without interfacing to PassPoint ACS or
VistaKey. A user can trigger an access point (i.e., door
strike) for 2 seconds by entering User Code + [0].
To program the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP for Stand-
Alone access control, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Output Programming in the #93 Menu
Mode.
2 Program the output type as 1, or 2.
3 For type 1, program the ECP address and
relay number.
4 For type 2, program the house and unit codes.
5 Program the relay number in field 176
(partition-specific).
See Output Programming in the Programming Guide
for a detailed explanation.
Programming for ECP Long Range Radio Programming for the Event Log
Program the LRR in Device Programming in the
#93 Menu Mode Programming.
Field 56: Selects the time the panel should wait
before it attempts to send a message to the second
destination..
Field 57: Select the initial reporting destination
for messages.
Field 58: Select events for the primary sub’s ID
Field 59: Select events for the secondary sub’s ID.
170 Event Log Types (1=enable; 0=disable for
each type)
171 12/24-Hour Time Stamp Format (0=12 hr;
1=24 hr)
172 Event Log Printer On-line (0=disable;
1=enable)
173 Printer Baud Rate (1=300; 0=1200)
Event Log Report Codes System Group #2 in the
#93 Menu Mode.
5-1
SECTION 5
Data Field Descriptions
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
About Data Field Programming
The following pages list this control’s data fields in numerical order. Field numbers are listed in the left column,
followed by a “Title and Data Entries column, which lists the valid entries for each field. Experienced installers can
simply follow this column when programming the data fields. The “Explanation” column provides explanatory
information and special notes where applicable.
NOTE: Refer to the Programming Guide for the default values. They are not listed in this section.
Use the
Programming Guide
to record the data for this installation.
NOTE: All references in this manual for number of zones, number of user codes, number of access cards,
and the event log capacity, use the VISTA-250BP’s features. See SECTION 1: General Description for the
table listing the differences between the VISTA-128BP and the VISTA-250BP control panels. All other
features are identical, except for the Remote Keypad Sounder (field 146 option 2), which is available only
in the VISTA128BP.
Programming Data Fields
Data field programming involves making the appropriate entries for each of the data fields. Start Data Field
programming by entering the installer code + 8 + 0 + 0 + 0.
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*00 Installer Code
Enter 4 digits, 0-9
The Installer Code is a 4-digit code reserved for installation company use.
This is the only code that can be used to enter the Program Mode from
the keypad. This code cannot be used to disarm the system if it isn’t used
to arm the system. This code cannot be used to re-enter Program Mode if
Program Mode is exited by the *98 command.
*04 Enable Random Timers For
Partitions 1-8
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the activation time of the window is randomized up to 30
minutes and is initialized by either of two methods:
User Code + [#] + [41] Initiates the random schedule for all devices in
the partition.
User Code + [#] + [42]
Initiates the random schedule for all devices in
the partition with a time window within 6 PM and 5 AM.
*05 System Events Notify
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled the system sends notification messages via the RS232 port.
Field *14 must be set for RS232 port (1).
NOTE: If enabled, the system also sends fault and restore messages via
the RS232 port.
*06 Quick Exit (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows users to exit the armed partition without disarming and
then rearming the partition.
Quick Exit is initiated by entering [#] + [9]. This restarts the exit delay.
All rules of exit apply, including exit error logic.
*09 Entry Delay #1 (partition-specific)
Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.
Entry delay defines the delay time that allows users to re-enter the
premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay
door and disarm the system without sounding an alarm. The system must
be disarmed within this period or an alarm will occur.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-2
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*10 Exit Delay #1 (partition-specific)
Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.
Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the premises
through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit delay door
after arming the system without setting off the alarm.
*11 Entry Delay #2 (partition-specific)
Enter 02-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.
Entry Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than
those assigned to Entry Delay #1.
This delay may not exceed 45 seconds for UL installations.
*12 Exit Delay #2 (partition-specific)
Enter 03-15 multiplied by 15 seconds.
00 = no delay.
Exit Delay #2 is used for a secondary door requiring a longer delay than
those assigned to Exit Delay #1.
This delay may not exceed 60 seconds for UL installations.
*13 Alarm Sounder Duration
(partition-specific)
Enter 01-15 multiplied by 2 minutes.
00 = no timeout.
Defines the length of time the Bell Output and the keypad’s sounder will
sound for all audible alarms.
Must be a minimum of 16 minutes for UL installations.
Burglary or RS232 Input
0 = burglary
1 = RS232 input
If enabled, sets terminal 23 (high side (+) of zone 9) as an RS232 input.
This enables the system to receive serial data (75 baud) via terminal 23.
UL Using the RS232 input for automation is not permitted in UL installations.
*14
*15 Keyswitch Assignment
Enter 1-8 partition keyswitch is being used.
Enter 0 if the keyswitch is not used.
The keyswitch requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 is no longer
available as protection zone). The fire and panic alarm voltage triggers
(J7) automatically become ARMING and READY status outputs for the
Keyswitch LEDs.
Openings/closing report as user “0” if enabled in field *40.
*16 Confirmation of Arming Ding
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, produces -second external alarm sounding (“ding”) at the end
of exit delay (or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing
reports).
Must be 1 for UL installations.
*17 AC Loss Keypad Sounding
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) occurs when AC power
is lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss).
*19 Randomize AC Loss Report
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, randomizes AC loss reporting between 10 and 40 min. after an
actual AC loss.
If disabled, AC loss reporting about 2 minutes after actual AC loss.
Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at the
central station during a community blackout.
*20 VIP Module Phone Code
1-9 = first digit of access code
or # = second digit of access code (enter #
+11 for “”, or # +12 for “#”)
To disable enter 00 for the 1st digit
If a 4285/4286 Voice Module is being used, enter the 2-digit phone code
used to access the system.
Must be disabled for UL installations.
*21 Prevent Fire Timeout
0 = disable (timeout)
1 = enable (no timeout)
If enabled, there is no timeout of the alarm sounder duration for all fire
zones, regardless of partition, so that fire sounding continues until the
system is reset.
If disabled, (timeout) the normal burglary sounder duration (field 13)
applies to fire alarms.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-3
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*22 Keypad Panic Enables (partition-
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the keypad panics (zones 995, 996, and 999) may be used in
this partition. There are 3 entries in this field, one for each panic.
*23 Multiple Alarms (partition-
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows more than one alarm sounding for a given zone during
an armed period.
NOTE: that multiple alarm soundings will not occur more frequently
than allowed by the programmed alarm sounder duration. This has no
impact on the number of communication messages transmitted.
Must be 1 for UL installations.
*24 Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper
0 = disable (tamper detection)
1 = enable (no tamper detection)
If disabled, the system monitors the tampers on expansion zones.
NOTE: Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper
switches or 5800 Series transmitters.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
*25 Burglary Trigger for Response
Type 8
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows triggering of Output 3 (pin 7) of the J7 header to
include zone response type 8 (24-hr. auxiliary).
*26 Intelligent Test Report
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, no test report is sent if any other type of report was sent since
the last test report.
If disabled, test reports are sent at the set intervals, regardless of
whether or not any other report has been sent.
Must be 0 for UL applications.
*27 Test Report Interval
Enter 0001-9999 for the test report interval in
hours.
Enter 0000 for test reporting.
If a test report is desired, enter a test code in Report Code Programming
in #93 Menu Mode. Set first test report time in field *83.
Maximum Test report interval is 0024 for UL installations.
*28 Power-Up in Previous State
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system, upon power-up, reverts to its status prior to a
complete power loss.
If disabled, the system always powers up in a disarmed state.
NOTE: Neither authority level 0 nor 5 can be used to disarm the system
if the control powers up armed.
Must be 1 for UL applications.
*29 Quick Arm (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY,
INSTANT, or MAXIMUM mode by using the [#] key instead of the user
code.
NOTES:
When armed, the system reports closing as User 0 if Open/Close reporting
for User #2 (typically a Master level user) was enabled for a given
partition.
If Quick Arm is used, the Installer Code and Authority Level 5 codes
cannot disarm the system.
TouchTone or Rotary Dial
0 = disable
1 = enable
Select the dialing method for the system
If you select TouchTone, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for TouchTone service. Note that
whether or not TouchTone dialing for call placement is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling
(ADEMCO High Speed) will still take place. See field 1*33 for TouchTone w/Rotary backup
*30
*31 PABX Access Code
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
This field is used to enter up to four 2-digit numbers representing the
prefix needed to obtain an outside telco line. If not required, enter
nothing and proceed to next field.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-4
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*32 Primary Subscriber’s Account
Number (partition-specific)
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber
account number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow
entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be
used, enter data only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth
location.
*33 Primary Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits. This is
the phone number the control will use to transmit Alarm and status
messages to the central station. Do not fill unused spaces.
NOTE: Backup reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number
is entered.
*34 Secondary Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits. The secondary phone
number is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful,
or if split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused spaces.
NOTE: If this field is programmed, a secondary subscriber account
number (field *90) must also be programmed.
*35 Download Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits. Do not fill unused
spaces.
NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.
*36 Download ID Number
Make entries as 2-digit numbers as follows:
00=0 01=1 02=2 03=3 04=4 05=5
06=6 07=7 08=8 09=9 10=A 11=B
12=C 13=D 14=E 15=F
Enter eight digits.
NOTE: This field is applicable only if downloading is utilized.
*37 Download Command Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
Enabling a function means that you are able to perform that function via
the ADEMCO Compass Downloading software.
Functions are as follows: Dialer Shutdown; System Shutdown; Not Used;
Remote Bypass; Remote Disarm; Remote Arm; Upload Program;
Download Program.
For UL installations, all entries must be 0.
*38 Prevent Zone XXX Bypass
(partition-specific)
Enter a zone number (001-250).
Enter 000 if all zones can be bypassed.
Enter three digits for zone that cannot be bypassed by the user.
NOTES:
The actions manual bypass, group bypass, auto-stay, and STAY/INSTANT
arming modes cannot bypass any zone programmed in this field.
The system will not arm if the zone is programmed with the vent zone or
force arm fault attributes.
*39 Enable Open/Close Report for
Installer Code (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, whenever the Installer Code is used to arm or disarm the
partition, an open/close report is sent to the central station.
*40 Enable Open/Close report for
Keyswitch
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, whenever the keyswitch is used to arm or disarm the partition,
an open/close report is sent to the central station.
*41 Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones
2-8)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If disabled, end-of-line resistors must be used on zones 2-8.
If enabled end-of-line resistors cannot be used and only normally closed
devices must be used.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-5
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*42 Dial Tone Pause
Enter the wait time for dial tone detection:
0 = 5 seconds; 1 = 11 seconds; 2 = 30
seconds.
Enter the time the system waits for dial tone before dialing. Applies if
true dial tone is not selected in field *43.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
*43 Dial Tone Detection
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system waits for true dial tone. If no dial tone is detected,
control dials at end of pause programmed in field *42.
If disabled, the system pauses for seconds entered in field *42, then dials.
NOTE: Disabling may be necessary in high-noise environment telco
networks where noise can be confused with dial tone, resulting in
premature dialing.
*44 Ring Detection Count
Enter 00 to disable ring detection.
Enter 01-14 for ring counts of 1-14.
Enter 15 to select Answering Machine
Defeat Mode
Only applicable if using a 4285/4286 VIP Module and/or if station-
initiated downloading will be used.
NOTES:
Do not enter 00 if a 4285/4286 is installed.
In the Answering Machine Mode, the caller should let the phone ring
once, then hang up, and call again within 30 seconds. The system, upon
hearing one ring followed by nothing, does not answer the first call, but
readies itself to pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is
received within 30 seconds (i.e., the downloader calling again).
Must be 00 for UL installations.
*45 Primary Format
0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO
High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express
Enter the reporting format for the primary telephone number.
*46 Low Speed Format (Primary)
0 = ADEMCO Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics
Enter the low speed format for the primary telephone number.
*47 Secondary Format
0=Low Speed; 1=Contact ID; 2=ADEMCO
High Speed; 3=ADEMCO Express
Enter the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.
*48 Low Speed Format (Secondary)
0 = ADEMCO Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics
Enter the low speed format for the secondary telephone number.
*49 Checksum Verification
Enter 2 digits, one for the primary and one
for the secondary.
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system for either or both primary/secondary formats sends
a verification digit to validate the message at the receiver without having
to send two message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2
reports.
*50 Sescoa/Radionics Select
0 = disable
1 = enable
If disabled, selects Radionics, which uses hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting.
If enabled, selects Sescoa, which uses only numeric reporting (0-9).
NOTE: The selection applies to both primary and secondary phone
numbers.
*51 Dual Reporting
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, all reports are to be sent to both primary and secondary phone
numbers.
NOTE: If used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to both
primary and secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary
only. If used with Split Reporting option 2, alarms go to both lines,
open/close and test messages go to secondary only, while all other reports
go to primary.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-6
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*52 Standard/Expanded Reporting
Primary
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,
Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the
primary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *45.
NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
*53 Standard/Expanded Reporting
Secondary
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Restore, Bypass, Trouble,
Open/Close, Low Battery. If enabled, expanded reports are sent to the
secondary phone number if low speed format is selected in field *47.
NOTE: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
*54 Unattended Mode
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system automatically calls the downloader at programmed
intervals.
NOTE: The following fields must be programmed first: primary
subscriber account number – field *32; primary phone number – field *33;
downloader phone number – field *35. Or you can go into the Unattended
Program Mode, from normal operating mode, by entering Installer Code +
[#] + [8] + [9].
*56 Dynamic Signaling Delay
Enter 00-15 times 15 seconds.
Select the time the panel should wait for acknowledgment from the first
reporting destination before it attempts to send a message to the second
destination (first and second destinations are determined in field 57).
NOTE: If the acknowledgment is received before the delay time expires,
no message is sent to the second destination.
*57 Dynamic Signaling Priority
0 = Primary Dialer
1 = Long Range Radio
Select the initial reporting path for central station messages.
*58 Long Range Radio Central
Station #1 Category Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the primary subscriber
ID of the Long Range Radio.
*59 Long Range Radio Central
Station #2 Category Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has six entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System, Test. If enabled, the reports are sent to the secondary subscriber
ID of the Long Range Radio.
*79 Zone Type Restores for Zone
Types 1-8
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types
that will send Restore reports.
*80 Zone Type Restores for Zone
Types 9, 10 and 16
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has three entries, one for each zone type. Select the zone types
that will send Restore reports.
*83 First Test Report Time
Enter 00-07the for day (01 = Monday)
Enter 00-23 for the hour
Enter 00-59 for the minutes
Enter the day and time that the first Test report shall be transmitted.
Enter 00 in all locations if the Test report is to be sent immediately upon
exiting. Enter 00 in the day location if the report is to be sent at the next
occurrence of the time that is set.
*84 Swinger Suppression (partition-
specific)
Enter 01-15.
Enter 00 for unlimited reports
This option limits the number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a
specific zone in an armed period. The system automatically resets the
shutdown for a zone after 48 hours if there are no trips on any zone.
Must be 00 for UL installations.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-7
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
*85 Enable Dialer Reports for Panics
& Duress (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has four entries as follows: Zone 995, 996, 999, Duress Enable
for each partition that the panics and duress reporting is desired.
NOTE: Non-zero report code must be assigned to zone 992 (duress) to
enable Duress reporting.
*87 Entry Warning (partition-specific)
0 = 3 short beeps
1 = slow continuous beeps
Select the type of warning for the entry delay period.
*88 Burglary Alarm Communicator
Delay (partition-specific)
0 = no delay
1 = 16-second delay
Select the delay, if any, for burglary alarm communications.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
*89 Restore Report Timing
0 = instant
1 = after bell timeout
2 = when system is disarmed
Select the time when restore reports are sent after an alarm.
Must be 2 for UL installations.
*90 Secondary Subscriber Account
Number (partition-specific)
Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15)
Enter a 3- or 4-digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber
account number. Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow
entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be
used, enter data only in the first 3 locations, and enter * in the fourth
location.
NOTE: This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is
used (field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary
account number.
1*07 Check or TRBL Display
0 = CHECK
1 = TRBL
Select whether the system should display TRBL or CHECK for trouble
conditions.
1*10 First to Alarm Display Lock
0 = scroll alarms
1 = lock display
If lock display is selected, the system displays of first fire alarm and
requires the user to press the [*] key for a display of each additional fire
alarm. Otherwise, the system automatically scrolls all fire alarms.
1*15 Cancel Verify
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system pulses the alarm output three times and displays
“Cancel Sent to Central Station” when it receives a “kissoff” of a Cancel
report from the central station This message can only be cleared by
entering the code + off.
Enter 0 to disable.
NOTE: Field 152 determines when a Cancel report is sent to the central
station.
1*17 Lobby Partition
0 = none
1-8 = partition number
Select the Common Lobby Partition.
1*18 Affects Lobby (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, causes lobby partition to disarm when this partition disarms.
NOTE: This partition must be armed before lobby can be armed.
1*19 Arms Lobby (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the
lobby partition automatically. To enable this field, field 1*18 must also be
enabled (partition-specific).
NOTES:
The lobby cannot be armed unless all partitions programmed for “affect”
(field 1*18) is already armed.
If his field is enabled, Field 1*18 for this partition must also be enabled.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-8
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
Exit Error Logic Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
Exit Error Logic functions as follows: the system at the end of the exit
delay, if a door is left open or an interior zone is faulted, starts the entry
delay period, and sounds the bell(s), siren(s), and keypad sounders for the
duration of entry delay. This gives the user time to re-enter the premises
and disarm the system before exit error occurs.
If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the
system bypasses the faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of
the system is armed. In addition, the following dialer reports are sent to
the central station if programmed:
Exit Error by User (not sent when is using ADEMCO High Speed format)
Entry/Exit or Interior Alarm with the zone number
Bypass reports
UL Exit Error Logic is not suitable for use in a UL installation.
1*20
Exit Delay Reset
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, when the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After
the user exits, closes the door and then re-enters the premises, the exit
delay time is reset to the programmed value.
NOTES:
Exit Delay Reset is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises
to retrieve a forgotten item without triggering an alarm.
This feature may only be activated once after arming.
UL Exit Delay Reset is not suitable for use in a UL installation.
1*21
Cross-Zoning
UL Cross Zoning is not suitable for use in a UL installation.
Cross Zoning is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted within a 5-minute period of each other to
cause an alarm on either zone. This prevents momentary faults from one of the zones from causing an alarm condition.
You can select four "sets" of cross-zones (programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25), keeping in mind the
following:
Both zones in each set must protect the same area.
Both zones in each set must be in the same partition.
A fire zone must only be crossed to another fire zone protecting the same physical area (see warning below).
DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. Cross a fire zone with another fire
zone only, and BOTH must be protecting the same physical area (no walls or partitions separating them). Consult
NFPA 72 standard for exact spacing requirements. We recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no
farther than 30 ft
.
Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation
In the event of a continuous fault (lasting at least 5 minutes) on one of the paired zones, a fault on the second zone
causes an alarm immediately.
If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0, the cross-zoning feature does not apply.
If an entry/exit zone is paired with an interior follower zone, be sure to enter the entry/exit zone as the first zone of
the pair. This ensures that the entry delay time is started before the follower zone is processed.
If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay activates without the other zone being
faulted.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-9
If a relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble, both zones must trip before the relay will
activate, and both zones must restore for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone List
Restore).
If the one of the zones trips and the second zone does not trip within the 5-minute period, an “error” message is
reported to the central station. The Contact ID event code is 378.
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
1*22 Cross Zoning Pair One
Enter 001-250
Enter 000,000 to disable
Select the first pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a
five-minute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL installations.
1*23 Cross Zoning Pair Two
Enter 001-250
Enter 000,000 to disable
Select the second pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a
five-minute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL installations.
1*24 Cross Zoning Pair Three
Enter 001-250
Enter 000,000 to disable
Select the third pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a
five-minute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL installations.
1*25 Cross Zoning Pair Four
Enter 001-250
Enter 000,000 to disable
Select the fourth pair of cross zones, which must both be faulted within a
five-minute period to cause an alarm.
Must be 000,000 for UL installations.
1*26 Panic Button or Speedkey
For A, B, C keys:
00 = panic function
01-32 = macro number
For D key:
00 = to select a macro to execute when key
is pressed
01-32 = macro number
Select for the A, B, and C keys whether the system performs a panic or a
speedkey function when the key is pressed.
Select for the D key whether the system performs a specific macro or if
the user will select a macro when the key is pressed.
NOTE: If a user code with global arm/disarm is used to execute the
macro, the user’s global capabilities will override any arm/disarm
commands in the macro sequence.
1*28 RF Transmitter Low Battery
Sound
0 = disarmed state only
1 = both armed and disarmed states
Select when the RF transmitter low-battery condition should display and
audible beep annunciate on the keypad.
Must be 1 for UL installations.
1*29 RF Transmitter Low Battery
Reporting
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system sends a Trouble message for RF transmitter low-
battery condition to the central station.
NOTE: The Trouble message will be sent for a transmitter supervision
failure, independent of this selection.
Must be 1 for UL.
1*30 RF Receiver Supervision Check-
in Interval
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).
00 = disable receiver supervision.
Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF receiver(s).
Failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time entered
results in the activation of the response type programmed for zone 990 for
the first receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and their related
communication reports.
Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL installations.
1*31 RF Transmitter Check-in Interval
Enter 02-15 times 2 hours (4-30 hours).
00 = disable transmitter supervision.
Select the check-in monitoring interval for the RF transmitters.
Failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision signal within
the time entered will result in a trouble response and related
communication report.
Maximum is 2 (4 hr) for UL.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-10
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
1*33 TouchTone with Rotary Backup
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system reverts to rotary dialing if communicator is not
successful in dialing using TouchTone DTMF on first attempt.
1*34 Communicator Split Reporting
0 = Split Reporting disabled
1 = Alarm, Alarm Restore, and Cancel
reports to primary, all others to secondary
2 = Open/Close and Test reports to
secondary, all other reports to primary
Select the type of split reporting for system communication.
NOTE: See *51 for split/dual reporting combinations.
1*35 Access Control Dialer Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
There are six entries for this field as follows: Trace, Trouble, Not Used,
Bypass, System, Alarm.
If Trace is enabled, access grant/denial events sent to the central station.
For the other events, if enabled, a report is sent to the central station.
1*42 Call Waiting Defeat
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system defeats Call Waiting on the first outgoing call
attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers.
NOTES:
After the panel's initial call to report the alarm, the panel may attempt to
make an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone restoral. If Call
Waiting is not defeated, an operator at the central station attempting to
contact the premises (to verify whether the alarm is valid) hears the
phone ringing indefinitely and must to dispatch on the call.
DO NOT enable this feature unless Call Waiting is being used.
1*43 Permanent Keypad Display
Backlighting (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, backlighting for the keypad display remains on at all times.
Otherwise the backlighting comes on when a key is pressed.
NOTE: When a key is pressed, display backlighting turns on for all
keypads in that partition.
1*44 Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, when more than 40 key depressions are received without a
valid sequence (arm, disarm, etc.), the control panel disables the wireless
keypad. The inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from
a wired keypad.
1*45 Exit Delay Sounding (partition-
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system produces slow beeping from the keypads during
exit delay and reverts to rapid beeping during the last 10 seconds of the
exit delay.
NOTE: The duration of the beeping is the programmed value of field *10
regardless of which entry/exit zone is used to exit the premises.
1*46 Auxiliary Output Mode
0 = ground start output.
1 = smoke detector reset.
2 = keypad sounds at an auxiliary sounder.
3 = AAV module.
Select the mode for output 1 on the J7 triggers.
NOTES:
Only one of the options may be active within the system.
Option 2 is available in the VISTA-128BP only.
Option 2 applies only to the partition enabled in field *15.
1*47 Chime on External Siren
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system produces chime annunciation on the external
alarm sounder.
1*48 Wireless Keypad Assignment
0 = none
1-8 = partition number
Select the partition in which RF keypad is used.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-11
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
1*49 Suppress Transmitter
Supervision Sound
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, no trouble soundings occur on the keypad for transmitter
check-in failures.
Must be 0 for UL.
1*52 Send Cancel If Alarm + Off
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, Cancel reports are sent when the system is disarmed after an
alarm, regardless of how much time has gone by.
If disabled, Cancel reports are sent within Bell Timeout period only.
1*53 Disable Download Callback
0 = callback required
1 = no callback required
Select whether a callback from the control panel is required for
downloading.
Must be 0 for UL installations.
1*55 International Date Format
0 = disable (mm/dd/yy)
1 = enable (dd/mm/yy)
Select the date format for display in the event log.
1*56 AC 60Hz or 50Hz
0 = 60Hz
1 = 50Hz
Select the frequency for the AC.
Must be set to 0 for U.S. and Canadian installations.
1*57 Enable 5800 RF Button Global
Arm
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system arms/disarms in accordance with the button’s
user’s global arming settings.
1*58 Enable 5800 RF Button Force
Arm
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows the RF button user to force a bypass of all faulted zones
when arming the system.
NOTE: When attempting to arm the system, the keypad beeps once after
the button is pressed if any faulted zones are present. The user should
then press the button again within 4 seconds to force-bypass those zones
and arm the system.
1*60 Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, zone 5 is used for 2-way audio (AAV).
Must be 0 for UL installations.
NOTE: Zone 5 cannot be used as protection zone.
1*69 Printer Type
0 = parallel printer
1 = serial printer
Select the printer type for the event log printout.
NOTE: if you are using a parallel printer connected to the VA8201 Alpha
Pager Module.
1*70 Event Log Types
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Check, Bypass, Open/Close,
System. If enabled, the system logs those events into the event log.
NOTE: Events are also logged into the PassPoint system, if installed.
1*71 12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format
0 = 12-hour
1 = 24-hour
Select the type of time stamping for the event log.
1*72 Event Log Printer On-Line Mode
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system prints the events as they occur.
If disabled, the system prints the log only upon request.
1*73 Printer Baud Rate
0 = 1200
1 = 300
Select the baud rate for the serial printer.
NOTE: Must be 1 if using the alphanumeric pager interface.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-12
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
1*74 Relay Timeout XXX Minutes
Enter 000-127 times 2 minutes (000-254).
This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command
numbers “04/09” and Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode
Programming output command “56.”
1*75 Relay Timeout YYY Seconds
Enter 000-127 seconds.
This is used for #80 Menu Mode Time-Driven event relay command
numbers “05/10” and Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode
Programming command “57.”
1*76 Access Control Relay (partition-
specific)
01-96 = relay number
00 = relay not used.
If enabled, the assigned relay closes for 2 seconds when the user enters
his code and presses 0.
Must be 00 for UL installations.
NOTE: See SECTION 3: Installing the Control for enhanced access
control capabilities.
2*00 Number of Partitions
Enter 1-8.
Enter the number of partitions used in the system.
2*01 Daylight Saving Time Start/End
Month
0 = disable
1 = enable
Enter the months (00-12) in which daylight saving time starts and ends.
Enter 00, 00 if daylight saving time does not apply to the user’s region.
Standard setting for U.S. is 04,10.
2*02 Daylight Saving Time Start/End
Weekend
0 = disable
1 = enable
Enter the start and end weekends for daylight saving time as follows:
1=first; 2=second; 3=third; 4=fourth; 5=last; 6=next to last; 7=third from
last. Standard setting for U.S. is 1,5.
UL Fields 2*05 – 2*08 must be set to 0 for UL installations.
2*05 Auto-Arm Delay (partition-
specific)
00 = no delay.
01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.
15 = no auto arming.
This is the time between the end of the arming window and the start of
auto-arm warning time (field 2*06).
2*06 Auto-Arm Warning Period
(partition-specific)
01-15 times 1-minute warning.
00 = no warning period.
This is the time that the user is warned by a keypad sounding and display
to exit the premises prior to auto arming of the system.
2*07 Auto-Disarm Delay (partition-
specific)
00 = no delay.
01-14 times 4 minutes (04-56) delay.
15 = no auto disarming.
This is the time between the end of the disarming window and the start of
auto disarming of the system.
2*08 Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the system automatically bypasses any faulted zones when it
attempts to auto-arm.
If disabled, the system will not auto-arm.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-13
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
2*09 Open/Close Reports by
Exception (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, Open/Close reports are sent only if the openings/closings
occur outside the arm and disarm windows.
NOTES:
Open reports are also suppressed during the closing window in order to
prevent false alarms if the user arms the system, then re-enters the
premises, for example to retrieve a forgotten item.
Openings and closings are still recorded in the event log.
This field must be set to 1 if No Opening and No Closing reports are to be
sent.
2*10 Allow Disarming Only During
Arm/Disarm Windows (partition-
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, disarming of the system is allowed only during the
arming/disarming windows, or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set to
1).
NOTE: This applies only to Operator-level users. Installer, Master, and
Manager-level users can disarm the system at any time.
2*11 Allow Disarm Outside Window if
Alarm Occurs
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows the system to be disarmed outside the programmed
disarm (opening) window if an alarm has occurred. Otherwise disarming
is allowed only during the disarm window.
NOTE: Used only if field 2*10 is enabled.
2*18 Enable GOTO for this Partition
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, this partition can be accessed from another partition’s keypad
using the GOTO command.
2*19 Use Partition Descriptor
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the normal keypad display will include a partition number and
four-digit descriptor.
2*20 Enable J7 Triggers for Partition
(partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, the J7 triggers function for this partition.
2*21 Supervision Pulses for LRR
0 = disable
1 = enable
There are three entries in this field as follows: Fire, Burglary/Audible
Panic, Silent Panic/Duress.
If enabled, causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J7 radio
triggers to the LRR. The LRR uses these pulses to determine that its
connection to the control is still intact.
Must be 1 for UL installations.
2*22 Display Fire Alarms of Other
Partitions (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be
displayed at this partition’s keypad(s).
2*23 Display Burglary & Panic Alarms
for Other Partitions (partition-
specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows burglary and panic alarms that occur on other
partitions to be displayed at this partition’s keypad(s).
2*24 Display Troubles of Other
Partitions (partition-specific)
0 = disable
1 = enable
If enabled, allows troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed
at this partition’s keypad(s).
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-14
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
2*30 Pager Installed
0 = disable
1 = enable
Enable if the alphanumeric pager interface is installed.
2*31 Delay Paging
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight locations, one for each pager. If enabled, the system
waits the delay time specified in field 2*32 before transmitting the
message after the dialer completes sending the message.
2*32 Time to Delay Pager After Dialer
000-024 times 10 seconds (010-240).
This delay should be set to allow enough time for the central station to
call back the premises in order to verify an alarm condition. Field 2*31
must be enabled.
2*33 Pager 1 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 1. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*34 Pager 1 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 1. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*35 Pager 1 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 1.
2*36 Pager 1 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*37 Pager 1 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*38 Pager 1 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 1 for the partition(s).
2*39 Pager 1 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
2*40 Pager 2 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 2. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*41 Pager 2 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 2. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*42 Pager 2 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 2.
2*43 Pager 2 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*44 Pager 2 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-15
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
2*45 Pager 2 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 2 for the partition(s).
2*46 Pager 2 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
2*47 Pager 3 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 3. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*48 Pager 3 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 3. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*49 Pager 3 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 3.
2*50 Pager 3 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*51 Pager 3 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*52 Pager 3 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 3 for the partition(s).
2*53 Pager 3 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
2*54 Pager 4 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 4. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*55 Pager 4 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 4. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*56 Pager 4 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 4.
2*57 Pager 4 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*58 Pager 4 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*59 Pager 4 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 4 for the partition(s).
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-16
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
2*60 Pager 4 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
2*61 Pager 5 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 5. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*62 Pager 5 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 5. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*63 Pager 5 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 5.
2*64 Pager 5 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*65 Pager 5 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*66 Pager 5 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 5 for the partition(s).
2*67 Pager 5 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
2*68 Pager 6 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 6. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*69 Pager 6 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 6. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*70 Pager 6 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 6.
*71 Pager 6 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*72 Pager 6 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*73 Pager 6 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 6 for the partition(s).
2*74 Pager 6 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
Section 5 – Data Field Descriptions
5-17
FIELD TITLE and DATA ENTRIES EXPLANATION
2*75 Pager 7 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 7. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*76 Pager 7 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 7. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*77 Pager 7 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 7.
2*78 Pager 7 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*79 Pager 7 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*80 Pager 7 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 7 for the partition(s).
2*81 Pager 7 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
2*82 Pager 8 Phone Number
Enter 0-9; #11 for *, #12 for #, #13 for a 2-
second pause.
Enter the paging service phone number for Pager 8. Enter up to 17 digits.
Do not fill unused spaces.
2*83 Pager 8 ID Number
Enter 0-9
Enter the Pager ID number for Pager 8. Enter up to 10 digits.
2*84 Pager 8 Format
0 = numeric
1 = ID
2 = alphanumeric
Enter the pager format for Pager 8.
2*85 Pager 8 Delay 1
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the phone number is dialed and before the pager
ID is sent, giving the pager system time to answer the phone call.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*86 Pager 8 Delay 2
000-060 seconds.
This delay occurs after the pager ID is sent and before the event
information is sent.
NOTE: Program only if using numeric format.
2*87 Pager 8 Partition Enable
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has eight entries, one for each partition. If enabled, the system
sends messages to Pager 8 for the partition(s).
2*88 Pager 8 Trigger Event Enables
0 = disable
1 = enable
This field has five entries as follows: Alarm, Trouble, Bypass, Open/Close,
System.
If enabled, the system sends a signal to the pager.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
5-18
6-1
SECTION 6
Scheduling Options
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
UL You must program Bypass and Auto-Arm Fail reports for UL installations.
Auto-disarming is not permitted in UL installations.
General
The scheduling features allow certain operations to be
automated, such as arming, disarming, bypassing of
zones, and activating relay outputs.
The system uses time windows (a programmed period
of time with a start and stop time) for defining
open/close schedules, holiday schedules, user-defined
temporary schedules, and access schedules for users.
Scheduled events are programmed by user-friendly
menu modes of programming (#80, #81, #83, and #93
modes), explained in detail in this section. These menus
take you step by step through the options.
Auto Arming
The system can automatically arm (AWAY Mode) a
partition at the end of a pre-determined closing
(arming) time window.
Auto Arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the
Auto-Arm Delay, the Auto-Arm Warning, or by
manually extending the closing (arming) time window
with a keypad command.
The system can also automatically bypass any open
zones when auto arming.
Auto-Arm Delay
Auto-Arm Delay provides a delay (grace period) before
auto arming. It starts at the end of the closing time
window.
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56
minutes in partition-specific program field 2*05. At the
expiration of this delay, the Auto-Arm Warning will
start.
Auto-Arm Warning
The Auto-Arm Warning causes the keypad sounder to
warn the user of an impending Auto-Arm.
The warning can be set from 1 to 15 minutes prior to
the arming in partition-specific program field 2*06.
During this period the keypad beeps every 15 seconds
and displays “AUTO ARM ALERT.” During the last 60
seconds, the keypads beep every 5 seconds.
The panel arms at the conclusion of the Auto-Arm
Warning period.
Extend Closing Window
A user can manually delay the arm (closing) time
window by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a
keypad command (User Code + #82), which then
prompts the user to enter the desired extension time of
1 or 2.
This feature is useful if a user must stay on the
premises later than usual.
The Auto-Arm delay and warning periods begin at the
end of the extension.
Force Arm
The Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to
bypass any faulted zones prior to auto arming (panel
performs a force-arm).
This option is set in partition-specific program field
2*08.
Auto Disarming
The system can automatically disarm a partition at the
end of a pre-determined opening (disarm) time window.
The disarming time can be delayed by using the Auto-
Disarm Delay feature.
Disarm Delay
Auto-Disarm Delay provides a delay before auto
disarming. This delay is added to the end of the disarm
time window.
The delay is set in 4-minute increments, up to 56
minutes, in partition-specific program field 2*07.
Restrict Disarming
This option allows disarming by users only during the
disarm time window and during the arming time
window (in case user needs to re-enter premises after
manually arming the partition).
This option is set in partition-specific field 2*10. If field
2*10 is set, we highly recommend setting field 2*11, as
well. This field allows the partition to be disarmed
outside the arm/disarm time windows only if the
partition is in alarm.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-2
Exception Reports
This option allows the reporting of openings and
closings to the central station only if the arming and
disarming occurs outside of the predetermined opening
and closing time windows. It is set in partition-specific
field 2*09.
The system can be programmed to send Failed to Open
and Failed to Close reports if the partition is not armed
or disarmed by the end of the corresponding time
window.
Limitation of Access of Users by Time
A user’s access to the system can be limited to a certain
time period. Outside this time, that user’s code is
inactive. The system provides up to 8 access schedules,
each consisting of two time windows (typically one for
opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and
two time windows for holidays.
The access schedules are programmed in the #80 Menu
Mode, and enabled when a user’s access code is added
to the system.
If a user tries to operate the system outside the
schedule, the alpha keypad displays “Access Denied.”
Time-Driven Events
The system can automatically activate and de-activate
relays at predetermined times to turn lights or other
devices on and off. The Time-Driven events can be
activated at different times in relation to a time
window:
At the beginning of a time window
At the end of a time window
During a time window (on at beginning of window,
off at end)
At both the beginning and end of the time window
(e.g., to sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of
a coffee break)
Random time at the start of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the start of the time
window)
Random time at the end of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)
Random during the time window (begins within 30
minutes after the start of the time window and ends
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window)
The system can perform the same actions on a daily
basis, or can perform an action only once (e.g., turn on
the porch light this Wednesday at 8:00 PM).
The system also provides up to 20 programmable
“timers” available to the end user for the purpose of
activating output devices at preset times and days.
Time Window Definitions
Scheduled events are based on time windows, (periods
of time) during which an event may take place. The
system supports up to 20 time windows, each defined
by a “Start” time and a “Stop” time.
The windows are shared by all 8 partitions, and are
used when programming the various schedules
(open/close, limitation of access), as well as for Time-
Driven event control.
Scheduling Example
A store that has the following hours:
Monday to Friday 9am to 6pm
Saturday 10am to 4pm
Sunday Closed
Holidays Closed
The owner desires the following time windows to allow
time for employees to arm or disarm the system:
Monday to Friday Open (disarm) 8am to 9am
Close (arm) 6pm to 6:30pm
Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am
Close (arm) 4pm to 4:30pm
Sunday & Holidays Closed
For this schedule, the four time windows need to be
programmed:
Window Start Stop Purpose
1 8am 9am Monday-Friday open window
2 9am 10am Saturday open window
3 4pm 4:30pm Saturday close window
4 6pm 6:30pm Monday-Fri. close window
Using the #80 Menu Mode, the installer can program
open/close schedules by assigning a time window to a
day of the week (windows are entered as 2-digit entries)
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Hol
Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl
01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00
NOTE: 00 is entered for those days on which the store
is closed.
Employees can arm and disarm the system, when
programmed, within the open and close time windows
without causing a report to be sent to the central
station (reporting by exception, field 2*09). The system
can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm in
case an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto-
arm/auto-disarm).
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
6-3
Open/Close Schedules Definitions
General
The open/close scheduling is controlled by one of three
schedules. Each schedule consists of one time window
for openings and one time window for closings.
There are three types of schedules available: Daily,
Holiday, and Temporary.
Daily Schedule
Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of
one opening window and one closing window per day.
Holiday Schedule
A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily schedule
on selected holidays throughout the year.
The opening and closing windows are programmed in
the daily schedule, but the holidays themselves are
defined in Holiday Schedule Programming in the #80
Menu Mode.
Temporary Schedule
The temporary schedule provides a method for the end
user to override the daily and holiday schedules. It
consists of one opening window and one closing window
for each day of the week. The schedule takes effect for
up to one week, after which it is automatically
deactivated.
This schedule is programmed using the #81 Temporary
Schedule Menu Mode.
Additional Schedules
Additional opening and closing schedules can be
programmed using the Time-Driven Event
Programming. For example, a schedule for normal
store openings/closings can be programmed with a daily
open/close schedule, and another open/close schedule
for a lunch hour can be programmed using the Time-
Driven event schedule programming.
Refer to “Time-Driven Events” later in this section for
detailed information.
Open/Close Reports by Exception
The system can help reduce communication traffic to
the central station by using the Open/Close Reports by
Exception feature. The Open/Close by Exception option
suppresses these reports from being sent to the central
station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected
time window. Reports are only sent if the arm or
disarm occurs outside the assigned time window.
The system keeps a record of all openings/closings in
its event log.
If a disarming occurs during a closing window (for
example, a person who arms the system forgets
something and has to re-enter), the Opening report
(although outside of the opening window) will not be
sent (as long as that disarming occurs within the
closing window).
This option is programmed in partition-specific
program field 2*09.
Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling
The following chart gives an example of how the Open/Close by Exception reporting works.
6:01PM 5:59AM 6AM 9AM 9:01AM 3:59PM 4PM 6PM 6:01PM 5:59AM
Early Opening reports are
sent if system is manually
disarmed before opening
window begins.
Early and Late Opening
and Closing reports are
programmable options
in the Report Code
Programming. They are
not dependent on the
programming of the
Exception Reporting
option.
Opening Window
No reports are sent if
system is disarmed
during this time
window.
If an arming occurs,
a Closing report is
sent to the central
station regardless of
how the Exception
Reporting option is
set.
Auto-disarm delay begins.
Auto-disarm occurs after delay (if
auto-disarm is enabled).
Missed Opening reports are sent
if manual disarming has not
occurred at expiration of opening
window.
Late Opening reports are sent if
disarm occurs after the opening
window expires.
Early Closing reports are sent if
manual arming occurs before the
closing window begins.
Missed Opening/Closing type
reports are programmed in the
Report Code Programming.
The Exception Reporting
option must be set for these to
be sent.
Closing Window
No reports are sent
if system is armed*
during this time
window.
* or disarmed if
user needs to re-
enter premises.
Auto-arm delay begins.
Auto-arm warning begins.
Auto-arm occurs after
warning expires (if auto-
arm is enabled).
Missed Closing reports are
sent if manual arming has
not occurred at expiration
of closing window.
Late Closing reports are
sent if system is manually
armed after the closing
window expires.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-4
Scheduling Menu Mode
The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to program
most of the scheduling and timed-event options. Enter
Installer Code + [#] + [8] + [0] from the normal
operating mode. NOTE: Only users with an Installer or
Master level user code may enter the #80 mode.
The following can be programmed while in this mode:
time windows
open/close schedules to each partition
holiday schedules
Time-Driven events (for system functions and relay
activation)
limitation of access schedules
Some scheduling features are programmed in Data
Field Programming Mode (Installer Code + 8 0 0 0).
Some features are programmed in the #93 Menu Mode.
The programming scheduling fields are listed below.
System-Wide Fields:
*04 Enable Random Timers
1*74 –1*75 Relay timeout values
2*01-2*02 Daylight saving time options
2*11 Allow disarming outside window if alarm
occurs
Partition-Specific fields:
1*76 Access control relay for this partition
2*05 Auto-arm delay value
2*06 Auto-arm warning time
2*07 Auto-disarm delay value
2*08 Force-arm enable
2*09 Open/Close Reporting by Exception
2*10 Restrict disarm only during windows
#93 Menu Mode (System Group #3)
Scheduling related report codes
Event-driven options are programmed using Output
Programming in #93 Menu Mode. Relay activation can
also be Time-Driven and that those are programmed
using the #80 Menu Mode. Refer to the Time-Driven
Event Programming later in this section for the
procedure.
Steps to Program Scheduling Options
This section contains examples of the
worksheets only. For complete worksheets,
see the Programming Guide accompanying
this Installation and Setup Guide.
In order to use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, use the
worksheets to do the following:
1. Define time windows (up to 20)
2. Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule
per day, per partition)
3. Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to
16)
4. Define limitation of access times (up to 8
schedules)
5. Define the Time-Driven events (up to 20)
NOTE: Temporary schedules are programmed using
#81 Menu Mode.
Use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode to perform the
following functions:
6. Program the time windows
7. Program the open/close schedules
8. Program the Time-Driven events
9. Program the access schedules
Scheduling Menu Structure
To program schedules, enter Scheduling Program
Mode:
Installer Code + [#] + [80]. (Installer or Master level
user code.)
Scheduling Program Mode can be entered only
when all partitions are disarmed.
There are 6 sections of scheduling menus accessed via #80, as shown below. Entering 1 at a displayed main menu
prompt selects that menu section. Prompts for programming that scheduling feature then appear. Enter 0 to skip a
section and display the next menu option.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Time Window ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Upon entering Schedule Menu Mode, this prompt appears. Enter 1 to program time windows. Refer to
Time
Windows Programming
later in this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “O/C Schedules?” prompt.
O/C Schedules ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules. Refer to
Open/Close Schedules Programming
later in
this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Holidays?” prompt.
Holidays ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program holiday schedules. Refer to
Holiday Schedule Programming
later in this section for
detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Timed Events?” prompt.
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
6-5
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Timed Events ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program timed events for relay outputs, additional schedules, and other system functions. Refer
to
Time-Driven Event Programming
later in this section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Access Sched?” prompt.
Access Sched. ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program access schedules. Refer to
Limitation of
Access Schedules Programming
later in this
section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the “Quit?” prompt.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to quit
#80 Scheduling Menu Mode
and return to normal operating mode.
Enter 0 to make any changes or review the scheduling programming options. If you press 0, the “Time
Window?” prompt is displayed.
Time Windows
The system provides 20 time windows that are defined
with start and stop times. These windows are used for
various open/close and access schedules, as well as for
output controls, and are the basis of the scheduling
system. These windows are shared among all 8
partitions.
Time Windows Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the
worksheet found in the Programming Guide. This
worksheet will help you define time windows and
scheduling aspects of this system before you program
them. Note that time windows can span midnight; for
example, from 11 PM to 1 AM.
Time Window
Number Start Time
(HH:MM) Stop Time
(HH:MM)
1
2
3…..20
A time window must have a start and a stop time.
Time Windows Programming
Enter Scheduling Mode by entering Installer Code +
[#] + [80]. The keypad displays the Time Window
Programming prompt.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Time Window ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to program time windows.
Time Window # ?
01-20, 00 = Quit 01
Enter the 2-digit time window number (01-20) to be programmed.
Press [] to accept the entry. Enter 00 + [] at the “Time Window #?” prompt to quit time window
programming and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 TIME WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM
If you entered a time window number, the cursor is now positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of
window entry.
Enter the desired start of window hour and press []. The cursor moves to the minutes position. Enter the
desired minutes and press []. Toggle the AM/PM indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is
under the A/P position and then press []. Repeat this to program the stop of window entry.
When the entry is completed, the “Time Window #?” prompt is displayed again.
Enter the next time window number to be programmed and repeat the procedure.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Because the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make sure that changing a
time window does not adversely affect desired actions in other partitions.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-6
Daily Open/Close Schedules
Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close
schedule, plus a holiday schedule. Temporary
schedules are programmed separately, using the #81
Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To program
additional open/close schedules, see Time-Driven Events
Programming later in this section for the procedure.
Open/Close Schedule Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the
worksheet found in the Programming Guide. Write the
previously defined time window numbers for open and
close for each partition.
Part Mon Tues Wed Thur Fri Sat Sun Hol
Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl Op Cl
1
2
3…8
Open/Close Schedule Programming
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “O/C Schedules?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
O/C Schedules ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program opening and closing schedules.
Partition # ?
01-08, 00 = Quit 01
Enter the appropriate partition number for which the following open/close schedules will apply.
Enter 00 + [] at the “Partition #?” prompt to quit open/close schedules programming and display the “Quit
?” prompt.
Mon P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the time window number 01-20 for the displayed day’s opening schedule beginning with Monday.
Enter 00 if no schedule is desired for a particular day. As the number is keyed in, the actual time that has
been stored for that window number is displayed as a programming aid.
Press [] to accept the entry.
Mon P1 CL WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the time window number for the displayed day’s closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window number is displayed.
Press the [] key to accept the entry.
Tue P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00
The keypad now prompts for Tuesday’s open/close schedule. Follow the procedure for Monday’s prompts.
When the last day of the week has been programmed, the holiday opening and closing window prompts are
displayed.
Hol P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00
Repeat the procedure for the holiday opening and closing time windows.
Press the [] key to accept the entry.
When the entries are completed, the “Partition #?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for
each partition in the system.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Holiday Schedules
A holiday schedule overrides the regular daily open/close schedule on the programmed holidays throughout the year.
The system provides up to 16 holidays that can be assigned for the system. Each holiday can be assigned to any
combination of partitions. List the desired holidays in a Month/Day format on the worksheet. Check the partitions for
which these holidays apply.
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
6-7
Holiday Schedule Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the worksheet found in the Programming Guide.
HOL Partition
Month/Day 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 /
2 /
3…16
Holiday Schedule Programming
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until the “Holidays ?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Holidays ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program holiday schedules.
HOLIDAY NUMBER ?
01-16,00=Quit 01
Enter the 2-digit holiday number (01-16) to be programmed and press [] to accept entry.
Enter 00 + [] at the “Holiday Number?” prompt to quit the holiday menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 ENTER DATE
00/00
The cursor is now positioned on the tens of months digit. Enter the appropriate month, then press [] to
proceed to the day field.
Enter the appropriate day for the holiday.
Press [] to accept the entry.
Part ? 12345678
Hit 0-8 x x
Holidays can be set for any partition, as follows. Press [0] to turn all partitions on or off, or use keys 1-8 to
toggle the letter “x” under the partition to which this holiday will apply.
Press the [] key when all desired partitions have been assigned.
The “Holiday Number?” prompt is displayed again. Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be
programmed.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Time-Driven Events
These schedules are used to activate outputs, bypass
zones, etc. based on time. There are 20 of these
schedules that may be programmed for the system,
each governed by the previously defined time windows.
The actions that can be programmed to automatically
activate at set times are: relay commands, arm/disarm
commands, zone bypassing commands, and open/close
access conditions.
Time-Driven Events Worksheet
The following worksheet is an example of the
worksheet found in the Programming Guide. Fill out
the worksheet using the steps outlined below.
Automatic Refresh Feature
The system automatically updates the status of all
Time-Driven Events upon any of the following
occurrences:
Changing of the time or date via #63 mode
Exiting #80 Scheduling Menu mode
Exiting Program mode
After a disconnect from the downloader
On a power-up
At Daylight Saving Time adjustment.
Sched Time Days Action Action Activation
Num. Window M T W T F S S H Desired Specifier Time
1
2
3…20
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-8
1. Enter the schedule number (01-20) and time
window number (01-20), and note the day of the
week the action is desired.
2. Enter the code for the desired action and
action specifier. The action codes represent the
events that are to take place when the scheduled
time is reached. Each action also requires an
action specifier, which defines what the action will
affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user
group). The action specifier varies, depending on
the type of action selected.
The following is a list of the Action Codes (desired
actions) used when programming Time-Driven
events. Note that these codes are independent of
the relay codes programmed during Output
Programming in the #93 Menu Mode.
Relay Commands
Action Code Action Action Specifier
01 Relay On Relay #
02 Relay Off Relay #
03 Relay Close for 2 seconds Relay #
04 Relay Close XX minutes (set
in field 1*74) Relay #
05 Relay Close YY seconds (set
in field 1*75) Relay #
06 Relay Group On Relay Group #
07 Relay Group Off Relay Group #
08 Relay Group Close for 2
seconds Relay Group #
09 Relay Group Close XX
minutes (set in field 1*74) Relay Group #
10 Relay Group Close YY
seconds (set in field 1*75) Relay Group #
Arm/Disarm Commands
Action Code Action Action Specifier
20 Arm-STAY Partition(s)
21 Arm AWAY Partition(s)
22 Disarm Partition(s)
23 Force Arm STAY (Auto-
bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)
24 Force Arm AWAY (Auto-
bypass faulted zns) Partition(s)
25 Arm INSTANT Partition(s)
26 Arm MAXIMUM Partition(s)
The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies
when using Time-Driven events to auto-arm.
Temporary schedules do not override an
auto-arming or auto-disarming programmed
in Time-Driven events.
The auto-arming window cannot be
extended using the Installer Code + #82
Mode.
Bypass Commands
Action Code Action Action Specifier
30 Auto bypass – Zone list Zone list #
31 Auto unbypass – Zone list Zone list #
Open/Close Windows
Action Code Action Action Specifier
40 Enable Opening Window by
partition Partition(s)
41 Enable Closing Window by
partition Partition(s)
42 Enable Access Window for
access group Access Group
Access Control Commands
Action Code Action Action Specifier
55 Access Point Grant Access Point #
56 Access Point Grant with
Override Access Point #
57 Access Point Protect Access Point #
58 Access Point Bypass Access Point #
59 Access Point Lock Access Point #
60 Access Point Exit Access Point #
61 Access Point Group Grant Group #
62 Access Point Group Grant
with Override Group #
63 Access Point Group Protect Group #
64 Access Point Group Bypass Group #
65 Access Point Group Lock Group #
66 Access Point Group Exit Group #
67 Access Point Partition Grant Partition #
68 Access Point Partition Grant
with Override Partition #
69 Access Point Protect by
Partition Partition #
70 Access Point Bypass by
Partition Partition #
71 Access Point Lock by
Partition Partition #
72 Access Point Exit by Partition Partition #
73 Access Point Trigger On Trigger #
74 Access Point Trigger Off Trigger #
77 Access Point Group Enable Group #
78 Access Point Group Disable Group #
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
6-9
3. Enter the desired activation time (when the
action is to take place). Select from:
Activation
Time Description
1 Beginning of time window.
2 End of time window.
3 During time window active period only (on at
beginning of window, off at end).
For example, if bypass is selected to activate during
the window, zones in a zone list are bypassed at the
beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end
of the window.
4 Beginning and end of time window (e.g., a coffee
break buzzer). In this example, if relay pulse is
selected, the relay pulses for 2 seconds at the
beginning of the window, signaling the beginning of
the coffee break. At the end of the window it pulses
again, signaling the end of coffee break.
5 Random time at the start of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the start of the time window).
NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “5”
occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the
window, the time window must be of a duration of at
least 30 minutes.
6 Random time at the end of the time window (occurs
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).
7 Random during the time window (begins within 30
minutes after the start of the time window and ends
within 30 minutes after the end of the time window).
NOTE: Since the randomization for choice “7”
occurs within 30 minutes after the start of the
window, the time window must be of a duration of at
least 30 minutes.
Field *04 must be enabled for randomization. A user
must initiate a random schedule by entering one of the
following sequences:
[User Code] + [#] + [41]. This will randomize, up
to 30 minutes, the activation time of all devices,
programmed for randomization, assigned to the
partition the sequence is entered in. Enter the
sequence again to turn off the random schedule.
[User Code] + [#] + [42]. This is the same as the
method above, except the randomization occurs
only on devices with activation times within 6 PM
and 5 AM. Enter the same sequence again to turn
off the random schedule.
Time-Driven Event Programming
The following menu items must first be programmed in
Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode:
Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)
Output Group (if applicable)
Restriction
Output Type (V-Plex, 4204/4204CF, FSA, or X-10)
Zone No. (V-Plex)
ECP Address (4204/4204CF or FSA)
Relay No. (4204/4204CF)
LED No. (FSA)
House Code (X-10)
Unit Code (X-10)
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press [0] until
the “Timed Events ?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Timed Events ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program timed events.
TIMED EVENT # ?
01-20, 00=Quit 01
Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20).
Press [].
The system then prompts the user to enter the desired action to be taken.
Enter 00 at the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt to quit the timed event menus and display the “Quit ?” prompt.
01 ACTION ?
none 00
Enter the action code for this timed-event number from the list at the left. This could be an output command,
an arming command, or any other Time-Driven event.
Press [] to accept the entry. The prompt for the action specifier appears.
ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER
01=Relay On
02=Relay Off
03=Relay Close for 2 seconds
04=Relay Close XX minutes
05=Relay Close YY seconds
Actions 01-05
If you selected actions 01-05, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay
number.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
01 RELAY # ?
00
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-10
ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER
06=Relay Group On
07=Relay Group Off
08=Relay Group Close for 2
seconds
09=Relay Group Close XX
minutes
10=Relay Group Close YY
seconds
Actions 06-10
If you selected actions 06-10, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the relay
group number.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
01 RELAY GRP # ?
00
20=Arm-STAY
21=Arm AWAY
22=Disarm
23=Force Arm STAY
24=Force Arm AWAY
25=Arm INSTANT
26=Arm MAXIMUM
40=Enable Open Window by
Part.
41=Enable Close Window by
Part.
Actions 21-26 and 40-41
If you selected actions 21-26 or 40-41, the prompt at the right appears. Enter
the partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter
a partition number again to deselect it.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
PART? 12345678
HIT 0-8 X X
30=Auto bypass – Zone list
31=Auto unbypass – Zone list
Actions 30-31
If you selected actions 30-31, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the zone
list number that contains the zones to be bypassed or unbypassed.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
01 ZONE LIST ?
ENTER 01-15 01
42=Enable Access Window for
Access group(s) Action 42
If you selected action 42, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the group
number to which the time window will apply.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
GROUP ? 12345678
HIT 0-8 X
55=Access Point Grant
56=Access Point Grant
w/Override
57=Access Point Protect
58=Access Point Bypass
59=Access Point Lock
60=Access Point Exit
Actions 55-60
If you selected actions 55-60, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
access point number.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
01 ACCESS POINT #
000
61=Access Point Group Grant
62=Access Point Group Grant
w/Override
63=Access Point Group Protect
64=Access Point Group
Bypass
65=Access Point Group Lock
66=Access Point Group Exit
77=Access Point Group Enable
78=Access Point Group
Disable
Actions 61-66 and 77-78
If you selected actions 61-66, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
group number.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
01 GROUP #
00
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
6-11
ACTION CODES EXPLANATION ACTION SPECIFIER
67=Access Point Partition
Grant
68=Access Point Partition
Grant w/Override
69=Access Point Protect by
Partition
70=Access Point Bypass by
Partition
71=Access Point Lock by
Partition
72=Access Point Exit by
Partition
Actions 67-72
If you selected actions 67-72, the prompt at the right appears. Enter the
partition to which the action applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions. Enter a
partition number again to deselect it.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
PART? 12345678
HIT 0-8 X X
73=Access Point Trigger On
74=Access Point Trigger Off
Actions 73-74
If actions 73-74 were selected, the prompt at the right will be displayed. Enter
the trigger number.
Press [] to accept entry. The “Time Window ?” prompt appears.
01 TRIGGER #
00
01 Time Window ?
00:00 00:00 01
Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the time window number is displayed.
Press [] to accept entry.
01 Active time ?
0
Enter the activation time from 1-10 (listed below). As the number is keyed in, the activation time is
displayed. The choices are:
1: Trigger at the start of the window.
2: Trigger at the end of the window.
3: Take effect only for the duration of the window.
4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the window. Example: coffee break buzzer.
5: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the start of the window.
6: Random trigger, up to 30 minutes, after the end of the window.
7: Take effect only for the duration of the window, but random start and end the window up to 30 minutes.
Press [] to accept entry.
Days ? MTWTFSSH
Hit 0-8 x x
The system then asks for which days the event is to be activated.
Press 0 to toggle all days on or off; or press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter “x” under the day on or off (Monday
= 1, Holiday = H = 8).
When all entries have been made, the “TIMED EVENT #?” prompt is displayed again.
Repeat the procedure for each timed event for the installation.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit
Scheduling Menu Mode.
Limitation of Access Schedules
Limitation of Access is a means by which a user’s
access code is limited to working during a certain
period of time. The system provides 8 Access
Schedules, each of which consists of two time windows
for each day of the week and two time windows for
holidays (typically, one for an opening time window and
the second for a closing time window). A user, required
to follow a schedule, would be assigned to an access
group of the same number (e.g., schedule 1= group 1).
The user’s access code is assigned to a group when that
user is added to the system. If no limitations apply,
enter 0.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-12
Limitation of Access Schedule Worksheet
Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access schedule.
Acc Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat Sun Hol
Sch W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2 W1 W2
1
2
3…8
NOTE: The holidays used for the access groups are the same as those defined in the holiday schedule.
Limitation of Access Schedules Programming
To program access schedules enter Scheduling Menu Mode Installer Code + # 80. After entering Scheduling Menu
Mode, press [0] until the “Access Sched. ?” prompt appears.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Access Sched. ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to program access schedules.
ACCESS SCHED # ?
01-08, 00 = Quit 01
Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.
Press [] to accept entry.
Enter 00 at the “Access Sched #?” prompt to quit the access control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.
MON A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the first time-window number (01-20) for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the number is
keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
Press [] to continue.
MON A1 Window 2 ?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the second time-window number from 01-20 for this access schedule for the displayed day. As the
number is keyed in, the actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
Press [] to continue.
TUE A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00 00
Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the last day of the week has been
programmed, the windows for holidays may be entered.
Hol A1 Window 1 ?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the first time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
Press [] to continue.
Hol A1 Window 2 ?
00:00 00:00 00
Enter the second time-window number for holidays for this access schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window is displayed.
Press [] to continue.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the main menu choices and continue programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu Mode.
Temporary Schedules
Each partition can be assigned a temporary schedule,
which overrides the regular open/close schedule (and
the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as
soon as it is programmed, and remains active for up to
one week.
Only users with the authority level of manager or
higher can program temporary schedules.
A temporary schedule affects only the partition from
which it is entered. Temporary schedules can also be
reused at later dates simply by scrolling (pressing [#])
to the “DAYS?” prompt and activating the appropriate
days. This should be considered when defining daily
time windows.
Section 6 – Scheduling Options
6-13
Temporary Schedule Worksheet
Partition/Windows Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 Disarm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
2…8 Disarm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
Temporary Schedules Programming
Enter User Code + [#] + 81 to enter this mode.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Mon DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM
This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the disarm (opening) window for Monday.
Upon entry of this mode, the cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the disarm
window. Enter the desired hour.
Press [] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.
Press [] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
Press [] to store the entries and move to the arming (closing) window for Monday.
Pressing [#] scrolls you through the prompts without making any changes.
Mon ARM WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM
This prompt is for entering the start and end times of the arm (closing) window for Monday.
The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start time of the arm window. Enter the hour.
Press [] to move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner.
Press [] to move to the AM/PM position. Pressing any key in the 0-9 range toggles the AM/PM indication.
Repeat the procedure for the stop time entry.
After the windows for that day have been completed, the system prompts for disarm and arm time windows
for the next day.
Press [#] if no changes are desired.
Tue DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM
Repeat the procedure described above for all days of the week.
When all the windows for all the days have been completed, the system prompts for which days of the
schedule are to be activated.
Days ? MTWTFSS
Hit 0-7 x x
This is the prompt that actually activates the temporary schedule.
To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “X” appears under that day, indicating the
temporary schedule for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0
toggles all days on/off.
The temporary schedule is in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week
progresses, the selected days are reset to the inactive state, but all other entries for the temporary schedule
remain programmed.
Press [] to store the entries or press [#] to exit the Temporary Schedule Entry Mode without making any
changes.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
6-14
User Scheduling Menu Mode
The system provides up to 20 “timers” available to the end user to control output devices. The output devices themselves
are programmed into the system by the installer during Output Programming in the #93 Menu Mode. The end user
needs only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor.
The installer may set certain outputs to be “restricted” during Output Programming (this prevents the end user from
controlling doors, pumps, bell outputs, etc.)
To enter this mode, the user enters User Code + [#] + 83.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Output Timer # ?
01-20, 00=Quit 01
Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20). Press [] to accept entry and move to the next
prompt.
Enter 00 to quit and return to normal operating mode.
06 07:00P 11:45P
PORCH LITE 04
If that timer number has already been programmed, a summary screen appears. In this example:
06 = Timer #
07:00PM = Start Time
11:45PM = Stop Time
PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4
04 = Output Device # affected by this timer
Press [] to continue.
06 ENTER OUTPUT#
PORCH LITE 04
Enter the desired output number (01-96). As the number is entered, the descriptor for that output device is
displayed.
Press [] to continue.
Entering 00 as the output number deletes the timer (Timer 06, in this example) and displays an output
descriptor of “None.” Output devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
06 ON TIME ?
07:00 PM
The cursor is positioned on the tens of hours digit of the ON time. Enter the desired hour. Press [] to
move to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled
by hitting any key from 0-9 while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
Press [] to continue.
06 OFF TIME ?
11:45 PM
The cursor positioned on the tens of hours digit of the OFF time. Enter the desired hour. Press [] to move
to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM indication is toggled by
hitting any key in the 0-9 range while the cursor is under the AM/PM position.
Press [] to continue.
06 DAYS? MTWTFSS
HIT 0-7 x x
To select the days to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An “x” appears under that day, indicating the
output for that day is active. Entering a day’s number again deactivates that day. Pressing 0 toggles all
days on/off.
The outputs are in effect only for the days highlighted with the letter “x” under them. As the week
progresses, the selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless the permanent option is selected (next
screen prompt).
When completed, press [] to continue.
06 Permanent ?
0 = NO,1 = YES 0
Selecting “Permanent” (1) means that this schedule will be in effect on a continuous basis. Selecting 0
means that this schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter “x” under the day is then cleared, but
all other entries for the output device remain programmed.
Press [] to accept entry.
The system quits User Scheduling Mode and returns to normal operating mode.
7-1
SECTION 7
Downloading Primer
(Remote Downloading is not a UL Listed feature)
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
General Information
Downloading allows the operator to remotely access,
program, and control the security system over normal
telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly
from the keypad can be done remotely, using
ADEMCO’s COMPASS downloading software. To
communicate with the control panel, the following is
required:
1. IBM PC-compatible 486 33MHz PC or better with
30 MB of available hard disk space and at least
8MB of RAM (12MB is preferred). Windows 3.X,
Windows 95, 98, or Windows NT.
2. One of the following modems:
ADEMCO CIA
Hayes Smartmodem 1200 (external: level 1.2
or higher; internal: level 1.1 or higher)
Hayes Optima 24 + Fax 96 external
Hayes Optima 336
BizComp Intellimodem 1200 w/volume
BizComp Intellimodem 2400
Other brands are not compatible, even if claimed to
be 100% compatible.
3. COMPASS DOWNLOADING software available on
CD ROM with a complete User’s Manual. It may
also be downloaded from the ADEMCO web page.
The web address is http://www.ademco.com.
Internal modems must have a 4-position DIP
switch. Modems with a 6-position DIP switch
will not work.
Access Security
The following four levels of protection guard the control
against compromise while it is being accessed from a
remote location:
1. Security code handshake: The subscriber’s account
number as well as an 8-digit ID number (known
only to the office) must be matched between the
control and computer.
2. Hang-up and callback: The control panel “hangs
up” and calls the computer back at the pre-
programmed number only if the security codes
match.
3. Data encryption: All data that is exchanged
between the computer and control is encrypted to
reduce the possibility of anyone “tapping” the line
and corrupting data.
4. Operator access levels: Operators may be assigned
various levels of access to the downloader, each
having its own log-on code. The access levels allow
the operators read/write capabilities of the
customers’ account information. For a detailed
explanation of the access levels, see the
downloading software User Manual.
NOTES:
Each time the control panel is accessed
successfully, a Callback Requested report is sent to
the central station, if Opening reports are
programmed.
When the system is downloading, the keypad
displays “MODEM COMM.”
After each download or save, an automatic time
stamp is done, to indicate the last download (or
save) and the operator ID number.
A complete hard copy of each individual account
can be obtained by connecting a printer to the
computer. Refer to your computer Owner’s Manual
or contact your dealer for printer
recommendations.
Unattended Download
Unattended download allows the control panel to
communicate with the download computer without an
operator at the computer. This feature is useful on new
installations.
The installer can mount the control, attach a keypad
and phone line, and continue to wire the rest of the
installation while the system is automatically
downloaded.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
7-2
The following items must be programmed for
unattended download:
The account number (field 32)
Primary central station telephone number (field
33)
The download telephone number (field 35)
Unattended Mode (enable in field 54.)
NOTE: The default for field 54 is enabled (1).
Installer Unattended Program Mode
The Installer Unattended Program Mode allows the
installer to program fields 32, 33, and 35 without
entering the normal program mode. Press 0 (NO) or 1
(YES) in response to the displayed menu selection.
Pressing 0 displays the next choice in sequence.
To access this mode, enter Installer Code + [#] + [89]. The following prompt appears:
PROMPT EXPLANATION
Unattend. Phone
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Press 1 to enter the unattended phone number.
Unattend. Phone 1
Enter the telephone number of the download software modem.
Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; A key = , B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the
key to accept the phone number and exit.
Press the # key to exit without changing any data.
The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit the Installer Unattended Program Mode, or 0 to
continue to the next prompt.
Unattended Acct#
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Press 1 to enter the unattended account number.
Unattended Acct#
15-15-15-15
Enter a 3-or 4-digit (depending on report format) account number 00-09; B-F (11-15). Each number requires
a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit account number is to be used,
enter digits in the first 3 locations, and enter 00 in the last location.
Press the to exit without changing any data.
The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.
Primary Phone
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Press 1 to enter the primary phone number.
Primary Phone 0
Enter the primary central station telephone number.
Enter up to 17 digits, 0-9; A key = , B key = #, C key = 2-Sec. Pause. Do not fill unused spaces. Press the
D key accept the phone number and exit.
Press the to exit without changing any data.
The system displays the Quit menu prompt. Press 1 to exit, or 0 to continue.
Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to quit the Installer Unattended Program Mode. Enter 0 at the “Quit ?” prompt to return to the first
menu prompt, “UNATTEND. PHONE”.
Trig. Unattended
1 = YES 0 = NO 0
Enter 1 to initiate the unattended download at this time. Otherwise enter 0.
NOTE: The ADEMCO Compass Downloader must be in Unattended Mode.
An unattended download may be initiated by the installer or end user at any time by entering User Code + [#] + [1].
Section 7 – Downloading
7-3
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel
At the protected premises, the control panel must be
connected to the existing telephone line (refer to
SECTION 3: Installing the Control). No programming
of the panel is required before downloading to an initial
installation unless you are performing an unattended
download.
When establishing a connection between the computer
and the control panel, the following occurs:
Stage What Happens
1 The computer calls up the control panel.
(The phone number for each customer must
be entered into the customer’s account file
on the computer.)
2 The control panel answers the phone call at
the pre-programmed ring count and
executes a handshake with the computer.
3 The computer sends a request for callback to
the control, unless callback is not required.
4 The panel acknowledges the request and
hangs up. During the next few seconds, the
control processes the request, making sure
certain encrypted information received from
the computer matches its own memory.
5 Upon a successful match, the control panel
seizes the phone line and calls the computer
back, unless callback is not required. (The
phone number to which the computer’s
modem is connected must be programmed
into the control field 35.)
6 The computer answers, usually by the
second ring, and executes a handshake with
the panel.
7 The panel then sends other default
information to the computer. If this
information matches the computer’s
information, a successful link is established.
The system is now “on-line” with the
computer.
Alarms and Trouble responses and reports
are disabled during actual uploading or
downloading sessions. If you are on-line,
but not actively uploading or downloading,
all alarms report immediately. All other
reports are delayed until you complete the
session.
The keypads remain active when on-line
with a control, but are inactive during
actual uploading or downloading sessions.
To download a control without programming any
information, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter the
Installer Code + [#] + [5]. The
panel temporarily enables a ring count of 5
and sets the Download Callback option to “1
(callback not required).
2 From the computer, call the panel using the
downloader software set to “First
Communication” Mode.
The downloader establishes a session with no
callback. The panel information can then be
downloaded.
On-Line Control Functions
The following functions can be performed while on-line
with a control panel (see field *37):
Arm the system in the AWAY Mode; disarm the
system
Bypass a zone
Force the system to accept a new program
download
Shut down communication (dialer) functions (for
nonpayment of monitoring fees in an owned
system)
Shut down all security system functions (for
nonpayment for a leased system)
Inhibit local keypad programming (prevents
takeover of your accounts)
Leave a message for customer
NOTE: Messages sent to the control panel from the
downloader will be viewable at ALL partitions.
Command the system to upload a copy of its
resident program to the office
Read: arming status, AC power status, list of
faulted zones, list of bypassed zones, 1000 event
log, list of zones currently in alarm, list of zones
currently in trouble, and ECP equipment list
Set the real-time clock
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
7-4
Scheduled Download
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP can be programmed
to periodically and automatically call the downloader.
When this option is set up, the system will call the
downloader at a scheduled time. Once the connection is
established with the modem, the downloader controls
which functions are performed (download, arm, upload
event log, etc.).
The programmable options for the scheduled download
are located in the #93 Menu Mode section under the
main menu prompt Scheduled Check-in.
The options are as follows:
Check-in interval (weekly, monthly quarterly,
yearly)
Quarter of the year (if quarterly is selected)
Month of the year (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly
is selected)
Day of the month (if monthly, quarterly, or yearly
is selected)
Day of the week (if weekly is selected)
Time of day
Refer to the #93 Menu Mode section in the
Programming Guide for sequence of the prompts.
Direct-Wire Downloading
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP can be downloaded
without using a modem or telephone line by using a
4100SM Serial Module and Compass Downloading
Software. The direct-wire downloading connection is to
be temporary, and is not part of the permanent
installation. Direct-wire downloading is meant as a
tool for the installer during the installation process.
The connections between the control and the
4100SM are different than those shown in the
4100SM Installation Instructions. See
Figure 7-
1
for the correct connections. In addition, in
place of the green wire, referred to in step 2 of
the “IN CASE OF DIFFICULTY” section of the
4100SM Instructions, use the violet wire
instead.
Connector J8 on the main PC board (see the Summary
of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this
manual) is intended to be interfaced to either a local
serial printer (see SECTION 3:Installing the Control) or
a computer. Make connections to a computer as shown
below. Note that the violet wire connection for a
computer differs from that used when connecting
a serial printer.
Remove the VA8201 Alpha Pager Module, if it
is installed, before performing the direct-wire
download. It may be reconnected once the
direct-wire download is completed.
123456789
NU
J8 CONNECTOR
VIOLET
GRAY
YELLOW
RED
GREEN
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
IN 2
GROUND
IN 3
GROUND
OUT 5
OUT 6
GROUND
GROUND
PRINTER DTR
4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4100SM SERIAL MODULE
+ PWR
- (GND)
RXD
not used
not used
TXD
not used
not used
RED BLUE WHITE
To TB6 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB7 Aux. Power (-)
Figure 7-1: Direct-Wire Downloading Connections
Telco Handoff
Telco handoff is another method of getting on-line with the downloader. The installer or customer enters the User Code
+ [#] + [1], while on the phone line with the computer’s modem phone line. The customer will get cut-off and the panel
and download computer will establish a connection.
8-1
SECTION 8
Setting the Real-Time Clock
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
General Information
This system provides a real-time clock, which must be
set in order for the system’s event log to keep track of
events by time and date. It must also be set in order to
execute scheduling programs (Time-Driven events). If
you are using Panel Linking, you can set the Real-Time
clock at one panel and have the system automatically
update the time and date at the other control panels.
Use a 6139/6160 alpha keypad to set the real-
time clock, or set the clock via the downloader
software. Only users with Installer or Master
authority level can set the clock.
Setting the Time and Date
To set the real time clock, perform the following steps:
Step Action
1 Enter Installer or Master Code + [#] 63.
Typical display shows:
TIME/DATE –– THU
12:01 AM 01/01/90
The day of the week is automatically
calculated based on the date entered. Time
and date entries are made by simply entering
the appropriate hour, minute, month, day
and year.
Press [] to move the cursor to the right of
the display, to the next position.
Press [#] to move the cursor to the left of the
display, to the previous position.
2 Enter the correct hour. Then press [] to
move to the “minutes” field.
3 Enter the correct minutes. Press [] to move
to the AM/PM position.
Step Action
4 Press any key 0-9 to change AM to PM, or
PM to AM. Press [] to move cursor to the
“month” field position.
5 Enter the correct month using a 2-digit entry.
Press [] to move cursor to the “day” field
position.
6 Enter the correct day using a 2-digit entry.
Press [] to move cursor to the “year” field
position.
7 Enter the correct year.
Press [] to continue.
8 The following display appears:
Broadcast Time?
1=YES 0=NO 0
If panel linking is being used, enter 1 (YES)
to send this time and date setting to all the
other panels. Otherwise enter 0.
Press [] to exit the real-time clock edit
mode.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
8-2
9-1
SECTION 9
User Access Codes
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
General Information
The VISTA-128BP allows a total of 150 security access
codes to be allocated. The VISTA-250BP allows a total
of 250 security access codes to be allocated. Each
security access code is identified by a user ID number.
Regardless of the number of partitions each code
has access to, it occupies only one user slot in the
system. If a particular code is not used in all
partitions, that user ID number cannot be used
again.
The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed
(partition-specific program field *29). The Quick Arm
feature allows the user to arm the system by pressing
the [#] key instead of the security code. The security
code must always be entered to disarm the system.
A user code other than the installer code
must be programmed in order for the Quick
Arm feature to function.
Users 001-050 are the only users that can
perform panel linking and are automatically
assigned panel linking access.
The system is shipped with the following defaults
for the user codes:
User 4-Digit Code Alpha Descriptor
User 1 (Installer) 4140 INSTLR
User 2 1234 MASTER
User Codes & Levels of Authority
Each user of the system can be assigned a level of
authority, which authorizes the user for certain system
functions. A user can have different levels of authority
within different partitions
Use the “View Capabilities” keypad function (User
Code + [] + []) to view the partitions and authority
levels for which a particular user is authorized. These
levels are described below.
Level 0: Installer (User 1) Code
Programmed in field *00 (default = 4-1-4-0).
Installer Open/Close reporting selected in field *39.
Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,
bypass, etc.), but cannot disarm if armed by
another code (or by Quick Arm).
Can add, delete, or change all other codes, and can
select Open/Close reports for any user.
Is the only code that can be used to enter program
mode. The Installer Code can be prevented from re-
entering the Program Mode by exiting using 98.
Must program at least one Master Code during
initial installation. Master Codes are codes
intended for use by the primary user(s) of the
system.
Level 1: Master Codes
Can perform all normal system functions.
Can be used to assign up to 148 lower-level codes,
which can be used by other users of the system.
Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.
May change his own code.
Can add, delete, or change Manager or Operator
Codes. Each user’s code can be individually
eliminated or changed at any time.
Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as
that of the Master who is adding the new user.
Level 2: Manager Codes
Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm,
bypass, etc.) programmed by Master.
May add, delete, or change other users of the
system below this level (Manager cannot assign
anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).
May change his own code.
Open/Close reporting is automatically the same as
that of the Manager who is adding the new user.
Levels 3-5: Operator Codes
Can operate a partition, but cannot add or modify
any user code (see table below).
Level Title Functions Permitted
3 Operator A Arm, Disarm, Bypass
4 Operator B Arm, Disarm
5 Operator C Arm, Disarm only if armed with
same code
Operator C (sometimes known as the Babysitter
Code) cannot disarm the system unless the system
was armed with that code. This code is usually
assigned to persons who may need to arm and
disarm the system at specific times only (e.g., a
babysitter needs to control the system only when
babysitting).
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
9-2
Level 6: Duress Codes
Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring
station if the user is being forced to disarm (or arm)
the system under threat (system must be connected
to a central station).
When the system’s Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are
connected to another communication’s media
(Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that
duress is signaled on the same trigger that signals
silent panic (whereas duress has its own unique
report when digitally communicated).
Assigned on a partition-by-partition basis, and can
be any code or codes desired.
Duress Reporting NOTE: A non-zero report
code for zone 992 (duress) must be
programmed, and partition-specific field *85
duress location enabled, to enable Duress
reporting.
The Duress report-triggering logic activates on the
5th key depression (such as OFF), not the 4th key
depression (last digit of code). Duress reports are
not triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when
you perform a GOTO or view the capabilities of a
user.
General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes
The following rules apply to users when making modifications
within the system based on the user code authority levels:
Master Codes and all lower-level codes can be used
interchangeably when performing system functions within a
partition (a system armed with a user’s temporary code can
be disarmed with the Master Code or another user’s
temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code
described above.
A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME
or HIGHER authority than that which he is assigned.
A user (levels 0, 1 and 2 only) may only ADD users to a
LOWER authority level.
A user may assign other users access to only those
partitions to which he himself has access.
A user code can be DELETED or CHANGED only from
within the partition it was created in.
User numbers must be entered in 3 digits. Single-digit user
numbers must, therefore, always be preceded by a “00”
(e.g., 003, 004, 005, etc.). Make sure the end user
understands this requirement. Temporary codes are entered
as 4-digit numbers.
Open/Close Reporting Note: When a user is added,
the system prompts for Open/Close reporting capability
only if the installer is adding the new user. When a
Master or Manager adds a new user, the new user’s
Open/Close reporting is the same as that of the Master
or Manager who is adding the user. If Open/Close
reports are required to be selectable by the Master or
Manager, the Installer should assign two Master or
Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting
enabled, and one without.
Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is
enabled if User 002 is enabled for Open/Close
reporting, and that Quick Arm reports as User 000. In
order for Quick Arm reports to be sent for all partitions,
User 002 must have authority and Open/Close must be
enabled for all partitions. If a code with access to all
partitions is not desired, it is suggested that user 002
be assigned authority level 5 in all partitions, and that
the code be kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot
disarm the system unless armed by that user.
ADEMCO Contact ID format is capable of
reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any other
report format is used, only user numbers 001 –
015 can uniquely report to the central station.
Users 016 – 150 will report as User 015.
Multiple Partition Access
Each user is programmed for a primary (home)
partition. A user can also be given access to operate
one or more additional partitions. Within each
partition, each user may be programmed to have
different levels of authority. For example, User 003,
the VP of Engineering, could be assigned to work
within the Engineering Department (Partition 1) of
ABC Manufacturing. Because he needs the full
capabilities in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER
with Level 1 authority.
He must also be able to gain access to the
manufacturing area (Partition 2) on an emergency
basis. You can set this up easily by requesting that he
also be assigned to Partition 2, with a level of authority
set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B).
The control automatically assigns him the same user
number within Partition 2.
EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS
Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Part 6 Part 7 Part 8
User 3 User 3
Level 1 Level 4
Master Oper B
In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority
in Partition 1 and OPERATOR B authority in Partition
2. His user number is the same for both partitions.
Note that if a user number is already being used in a
partition, the system will automatically assign a new
user an unused number. Also notice that no access is
allowed for this user into Partitions 3 – 8. Attempts to
access these partitions would be denied automatically.
Section 9 – User Access Codes
9-3
Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
During user code entry, normal key
depressions at other keypads in a partition are
ignored. However, panic key depression
causes an alarm and terminates user entry.
When entering panel link users (001-050) on
the local panel, the other remote panels will be
prevented from entering panel link user data
until the local panel exits User Edit Mode.
Enter Installer Code+ [8] + new user no. (002-250)
+ new user’s code
Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a
higher level of authority than the code being changed
(e.g., a Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code,
but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
Keypad prompts for the authority level for this user.
NOTE: All references to the number of user codes
pertain to the VISTA-250BP. The VISTA-128BP
allows only 150 user codes.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
User Number = 003
Enter Auth. Level
Enter the level number as follows:
1 = Master
2 = Manager
3 = Operator Level A
4 = Operator Level B
5 = Operator Level C
6 = Duress
Keypad then prompts for Open/Close reporting option for this user.
Open/Close Rep.?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not arming/disarming by this user will trigger Opening
and Closing reports. This prompt appears only if the Installer Code is used to add a user.
Group Bypassing?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Enter 1 (YES) to allow this user to perform group bypasses. Enter 0 (NO) this user will not be able to
perform group bypasses.
NOTE: In addition to enabling the user for group bypassing, the user must also have access to the
partition(s) containing the zones being bypassed and have global arming capability.
Access Group?
Enter 0-8
If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt appears. Enter the user’s access group number
(1-8) if this user should have limited access to the system. Enter 0 if no access group should be assigned.
RF Button ?
0=NO , 1=YES
If a 5800 Series button transmitter has been enabled for arming/disarming functions, and is not assigned to
a user, this prompt appears. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
Enter Button ZN #
(001-087)
If you answered “yes” to the RF button question, the zone number for the button is requested. Enter any
one of the zone numbers assigned to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY, or DISARM. The system then
assigns all buttons of the transmitter to this user number.
Multi-Access ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this partition only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to have access
to more than one partition. If NO, the program exits this mode. If YES, the keypad prompts for the Global
Arm option for this user.
Global Arm ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will be allowed to arm more than one partition via
Global Arm prompts.
The keypad now prompts for the user’s access to the next partition.
Part. 2 – SHOP ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether this user will have access to the displayed partition
number. If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the next partition number in sequence.
If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:
User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see Authority Level prompt above).
Open/Close option for this user in the displayed partition (see Open/Close prompt above).
Global Arm option for this user in the displayed partition.
When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad will scroll through all partitions to which access has
been assigned, and will display the user number, authority level, open/close and global arm options that
were programmed for each partition to which the user was granted access. For example:
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
9-4
PROMPT EXPLANATION
XMT USER DATA
1 = YES 0 = NO
If the user number is from 001-050 this appears. Answer YES (1) to have the system send the user’s
attributes to all the other control panels that are “linked” to this control. If you answer NO (0), the system
displays the following prompt on the next page.
INDV USER PGM
1 = YES 0 = NO
Answer YES (1) to link to another control panel and manually enter the user into partition(s) in that control
panel. If you answer NO (0), the system scrolls through each partition displaying a summary of the user’s
attributes in each partition (see next prompt).
Part. 1 A0* WHSE
User 003 Auth=3G.
Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates that the global arm feature is enabled for this user in
the displayed partition, and that the period at the end of the second line indicates Open/Close reporting is
enabled for this user in the displayed partition. The “T” indicates the partition from which the user may be
changed or deleted.
Changing a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
Enter Installer Code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-250) + new user’s code
*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a
Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
NOTE: The VISTA-128BP allows only 150 user codes.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
User Number = 003
NEW USER?
The system detects that the user number is already assigned, and prompts if this is a new user.
Press 0 (NO).
The system then confirms that the change is allowed based on authorization level.
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User
To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user’s global arm option, first delete that user’s code, then re-add
the user code as described in the “Adding a Master, Manager, or Operator Code” paragraph.
Deleting a Master, Manager, or Operator Code
Enter your code*+ [8] + new user no. (002-150) + your code again
*Or Master or Manager Code, but the code must be a higher level of authority than the code being changed (e.g. a
Manager Code can add an Operator-level Code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager Code).
NOTE: The VISTA-128BP allows only 150 user codes.
PROMPT EXPLANATION
OK TO DELETE 003?
0=NO 1=YES
The system prompts to confirm that you want to delete this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
If you answered “yes,” that user’s code is removed from all partitions to which it was assigned, and all
authorization levels and other information about that user are deleted. Note that a user can be deleted only
by a user with a higher authority level. A user cannot delete himself.
A user code can be deleted only from the partition through which it was entered. If an attempt is made to
delete from another partition, the message “User [XXX] Not Deleted” is displayed.
Exiting the User Edit Mode
Press either [] or [#], or don’t press any key for 10 seconds.
10-1
SECTION 10
Testing the System
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
Battery Test
When AC power is present, the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-
250BP runs a brief battery test every 60 seconds to
determine if there is a battery connected, and runs an
extended battery test every 4 hours to check on the
battery’s condition.
If the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP finds that the
battery voltage is low (less than approximately 11.5V),
it initiates a keypad “SYSTEM LOBAT” display and a
rapid keypad beeping sound. It also sends a Low
Battery report to the central station (if programmed).
The keypad is cleared by entering any security code +
OFF, and a Restore report is sent to the central station
if the situation has been corrected.
Dialer Test
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP may be programmed
to automatically transmit test reports to a central
station at intervals ranging from once per hour to once
per 9999 hours (field 27).
UL requires the test report to be transmitted at least
once every 24 hours. The system can be programmed to
send the first report at any time of the day, or on any
day of the week (field 83).
Burglary Walk-Test (Code + [5] TEST)
This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in
response to faults on zones for the purpose of allowing
proper zone operation to be checked without triggering
alarms. This test can be activated by any-level user by
entering the corresponding security code and pressing
TEST while the burglary portion of the system is
disarmed. UL requires that this test be conducted on a
weekly basis.
When this test is first entered, the system activates the
alarm output for 3 seconds. The system sends a Start
of Walk-Test message to the central station. The
keypad displays “Burg Walk Test in Progress” and
sounds a single beep every 15 seconds while the test
remains active.
Open and close each protected door and window in
turn. Each action should produce 3 beeps from the
keypad. Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen
for three beeps when the detector senses movement.
The keypad displays the zone number and alpha
descriptor while a door or window remains open or
while a detector remains activated. The system
automatically issues a Zone 8 Glassbreak Detector
Power Reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on
this zone, to allow faulted detectors to be reset.
To end this test, enter any security code and press OFF.
An End of Walk-Test message is sent to the central
station.
Armed Burglary System Test
Alarm messages are sent to the central
station during the armed system tests.
Notify the central station that a test will be
in progress.
A display of “COMM. FAILURE” indicates
a failure to communicate (no kissoff by the
receiver at the central station after the
maximum number of transmission
attempts is tried). If this occurs, verify that
the phone line is connected, the correct
report format is programmed, etc.
To perform an armed burglary test, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Notify the central station that a test of the
system is being performed.
2 Arm the system.
3 Fault one or more zones.
4 Silence alarm sounder(s) each time by
entering the code and pressing OFF.
NOTE: The system must be rearmed after
each code + off sequence.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
10-2
Step Action
5 Check that entry/exit delay zones provide the
assigned delay times.
6 Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if
programmed, by pressing the panic key pairs
( and #, 1 and , and/or 3 and #).
The word ALARM and a descriptor “999” are
displayed for and #. If [1] and [] are
pressed, “995” is displayed; if [3] and [#] are
pressed, “996” is displayed.
Step Action
7 If the system has been programmed for
audible emergency, the keypad emits a loud,
steady alarm sound. Silence the alarm by
entering the security code and pressing OFF.
If the system has been programmed for silent
panic, there are no audible alarms or
displays. A report is sent to the central
station, however.
8 Notify the central station that all tests are
finished, and verify results with them.
Testing Wireless Transmitters
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode
Use the Transmitter Sniffer Mode to test that
transmitters have all been properly programmed.
If a transmitter does not have its serial number
“enrolled,” it will not turn off its zone number.
To enter the Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, proceed as
follows:
Step Action
1 Enter
Installer Code + [#] + [3]. The
keypad displays all zone numbers of wireless
units programmed into the system.
2 Fault each wireless zone, causing each device
to transmit.
As the system receives a signal from each of
the transmitters, the zone number of that
transmitter disappears from the display.
3 Enter
Installer Code + OFF to exit the
Sniffer Mode.
Go/No Go Test Mode
Checking the transmitters in this mode assists in
determining good mounting locations, and verifies that
the RF transmission has sufficient signal amplitude
margin for the installed system.
All partitions containing wireless
transmitters must be placed in the test
mode for sensitivity reduction of the RF
receiver (50% sensitivity). Otherwise, the
RF receiver remains at full strength.
Make sure that all partitions are disarmed
when performing this test, as the wireless
receiver gain is reduced in half.
To enter the Go/No Go Test Mode, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Enter
Installer Code + [5].
2 Fault each wireless transmitter, causing each
device to transmit.
NOTE: If a single receiver is used, the
keypad beeps three times to indicate signal
reception. If two receivers are used, the
keypad beeps once if the first receiver
received the signal, twice if the second
receiver received the signal, and three times
if both receivers heard the signal.
3 If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move
the transmitter to another location. Usually
a few inches in either direction is all that is
required.
4 Enter
Installer Code + OFF to exit the
Go/No Go Test Mode.
Section 10 – Testing The System
10-3
Trouble Conditions
Check or Trouble Messages
Display Description
CHECK or
TRBL
(as per field
107)
This indicates that a problem exists on
the zone number displayed. Zone trouble
may be caused by one of the following
conditions:
A hardwired fire zone is open
(broken wire).
A Day/Night zone (zone type 5) is
faulted.
A polling loop zone is not seen by
the control panel.
A polling loop zone has been
tampered (cover removed on a
4190).
A wireless zone has not checked in
during the time programmed in field
131.
A 5800 Series transmitter has been
tampered (cover removed).
CHECK 6XX
XX = 01-32 This indicates a trouble on a 4204CF
Supervised Bell Output (corresponding
relay number 01-32).
CHECK 8XX
XX = 00-30 This indicates a trouble on a peripheral
device (connected to the panel’s keypad
terminals) of the corresponding device
address (00-30).
CHECK 9XX
XX = 00-99 This indicates that a system trouble
exists (RF receiver, bell output, etc.).
If the problem has been corrected, enter an
OFF sequence (Security Code + OFF) twice to
clear the display.
Power Failure
Display Description
AC LOSS
POWER
LED is off
This indicates that the system is
operating on battery power only. Check
to see that the circuit breaker for the
branch circuit that your system’s
transformer is wired to has not been
accidentally turned off. Instruct the
user to call a service representative
immediately if AC power cannot be
restored.
Other System Messages
Display Description
COMM
FAILURE This indicates that a failure occurred in
the telephone communication portion of
your system.
LO BAT This indicates that a low-battery
condition exists in the wireless
transmitter displayed. Pressing any key
silences the audible warning sound.
SYSTEM LO
BAT This indicates that a low-battery
condition exists with the system’s
backup battery.
RCVR
SETUP
ERROR
This indicates that the system has more
wireless zones programmed than the
wireless receiver can support. If this is
not corrected, none of the zones in the
system will be protected. If additional
wireless zones are desired, use an
appropriate receiver.
MODEM
COMM This indicates that the control is on-line
with a remote computer.
To the Installer
Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually)
by the installer and frequent testing by the user are
vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any alarm
system.
The installer should assume the responsibility of
developing and offering a regular maintenance program
to the user as well as acquainting the user with the
proper operation and limitations of the alarm system
and its component parts. Recommendations must be
included for a specific program of frequent testing (at
least weekly) to ensure the system’s proper operation at
all times.
Turning the System over to the User
Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by
going over each of its functions, as well as the User’s
Manual supplied.
In particular, explain the operation of each zone
(entry/exit, perimeter, interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the
user understands how to operate any emergency
feature(s) programmed into the system.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
10-4
Contacting Technical Support
PLEASE, before you call Technical Support, be sure
you:
READ THE INSTRUCTIONS!
Check all wiring connections.
Determine that the power supply and/or backup
battery are supplying proper voltages.
Verify your programming information where
applicable.
Verify that all keypads and devices are addressed
properly.
Note the proper model number of this product, and
the version level (if known) along with any
documentation that came with the product.
Note your ADEMCO customer number and/or
company name.
Having this information handy will make it easier for
us to serve you quickly and effectively.
You may contact Technical Support via Toll-Free Fax.
Please include your return fax number. You will receive
a reply within 24 hours. You may also contact Technical
Support via modem to ATLIS-BBS, Tech Support’s
Electronic Bulletin Board System. Replies are posted
within 24 hours.
Technical Support:.................................................... 1-800-645-7492 (8 a.m.-8 p.m. EST)
Technical Support Fax Number: ...............................................................1-800-447-5086
ATLIS-BB Electronic Bulletin Board System: ............................................1-516-496-3980
(1200 – 9600 Baud, 8 Data Bits, 1 Start/Stop Bit, No Parity)
ATLIS-FAX FAXBACK Automated Fax Retrieval System:.....................1-800-573-0153 or
.................................................................................................1-516-921-6704 / ext. 1667
World Wide Web Address: ...............................................HTTP://WWW.ADEMCO.COM
A-1
APPENDIX A
Regulatory Agency Statements
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
UL Installation Requirements
The following requirements apply to both UL Residential and UL Commercial Burglary installations:
All partitions must be owned and managed by the same person(s).
All partitions must be part of one building at one street address.
The audible alarm device(s) must be placed where it/they can be heard by all partitions.
The control cabinet must be protected from unauthorized access. This can be done by installing a tamper switch on
the cabinet door (not supplied with VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP) or by installing a UL Listed passive infrared
detector positioned to detect cabinet access. Wire the selected device to any EOLR-supervised zone (Zone 1-8).
Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour audible alarm (type 07) response. The 24-hour
alarm response must be used for multiple-partitioned systems.
Remote downloading and auto-disarming are not UL Listed features.
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault
Use the following guidelines for a Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local Mercantile Safe & Vault installation:
All zones must be configured for EOLR supervision (41=0). Wireless sensors may not be used. If 4190WH RPMs
are used, set field 24 to “0” to enable tamper detection.
Attach a door tamper switch (supplied) to the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP cabinet backbox. For safe and vault
installations, a shock sensor (not supplied) must also be attached to the backbox. (Also see SECTION 3: Installing
the Control)
Wire an ADEMCO AB12 Grade A Bell/Box to the bell output. Bell wires must be run in conduit. Program the bell
output for a timeout of 16 minutes or longer timeout and for confirmation of arming ding. (Also see SECTION 3:
Installing the Control.)
Wire the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP tamper switch and AB12 Bell/Box tamper switches to any EOLR-supervised
zone (zones 1-8). Program this zone for day trouble/night alarm (type 05) or 24-hour audible alarm (type 07)
response. The 24-hour alarm response must be used for multiple-partitioned systems.
Entry delays must not exceed 45 seconds, and exit delays must not exceed 60 seconds.
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
You may use the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP dialer alone, or the 7720 Long Range Radio alone.
When using the dialer, program it to send Burglary Alarm, Low Battery, and Communicator Test reports. Field
27 must be set to “0024” (or less).
If you are using the 7720, connect it to the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
For Grade AA Service:
You must use a 7920SE Long Range Radio.
Connect the 7920SE to the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP burglary/audible panic alarm trigger.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
A-2
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm
Follow the instructions for UL609 Local installations given above.
For Grade A Service:
You must use the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP’ dialer with a 7720 Long Range Radio.
Connect the control’s burglary/audible panic alarm trigger (on J7 header) and the 659EN’s phone line monitor
output to the 7720. The 7720 will send a report to the central station when a telephone line fault condition is
detected.
Also connect the 7720’s radio fault output to one of the VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP’ EOLR-supervised zones (i.e., 1-
8). Program this zone for a trouble by day/alarm by night (type 05) or a 24-hour alarm (type 07, 08) response to
radio faults.
Program the control’s dialer to send Burglary Alarm, Trouble, Opening/Closing, and Low Battery reports.
For Grade AA Service:
Follow the instructions for Grade A service, except use the 7920SE in place of the 7720.
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and UL Residential Fire Battery Backup
Requirements
The California State Fire Marshal and UL have regulations that require all residential fire alarm control panels to have
backup battery with sufficient capacity to operate the panel and its attached peripheral devices for 24 hours in the
intended standby condition, followed by at least 4 minutes in the intended fire alarm signaling condition.
The VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP can meet this requirement without using a supplemental power supply, provided that
the panel’s outputs (including the current drawn from the auxiliary power output terminals) are limited as shown
below:
Output current is limited to 750mA maximum total auxiliary power, polling loop, and bell output current.
Maximum auxiliary current is 300mA (including polling loop current).
A 14AH battery is used. (Yuasa model NP7-12 recommended; use two connected in parallel.) A dual-battery harness
is provided with ADEMCO No. 4100EOLR Resistor Kit (kit also contains EOL resistors having spade lug/heat
shrink tubing construction approved by UL and CSFM for fire zone usage). Both batteries fit inside the panel’s
cabinet.
Appendix A – Regulatory Agency Statements
A-3
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) PART 15 STATEMENT
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS
In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the
RJ31X (CA38A in Canada) wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on
installation of the system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the control panel. Doing so will
result in the loss of your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the control panel has been
disconnected from the phone lines, the control panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If
upon disconnection of the control panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company
that it has a problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or
out of warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an
authorized service agency for all repairs. FCC PART 68 NOTICE
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the front cover of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number (REN) for
this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the telephone company.
This equipment uses the following jacks:
An RJ31X is used to connect this equipment to the telephone network.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most,
but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to
determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC if you believe necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in
order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact the manufacturer for repair and warranty
information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request
that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
There are no user serviceable components in this product, and all necessary repairs must be made by the
manufacturer. Other repair methods may invalidate the FCC registration on this product.
This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line
Service is subject to state tariffs.
This equipment is hearing-aid compatible.
When programming or making test calls to an emergency number, briefly explain to the dispatcher the
reason for the call. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning or late evening.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
A-4
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
NOTICE
The Industry Canada Label identifies certified
equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunications network
protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal
Equipment Technical Requirements document(s).
The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should
ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the
facilities of the local telecommunications company.
The equipment must also be installed using an
acceptable method of connection. The customer
should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service
in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be
coordinated by a representative designated by the
supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the
user to this equipment, or equipment
malfunctions, may cause the telecommunications
company to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that
the electrical ground connections of the power
utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic
water pipe system, if present, are connected
together. This precaution may be particularly
important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such
connections themselves, but should contact an
appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
NOTICE: The Ringer Equivalence Number
(REN) assigned to each terminal device provides
an indication of the maximum number of
terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. The termination on an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only
to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer
Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not
exceed 5.
AVIS
L’étiquette d’Industrie Canada identifie le
matériel homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le
matériel est conforme aux normes de protection,
d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de
communications, comme le prescrivent les
documents concernant les exigences techniques
relatives au matériel terminal. Le Ministère
n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel fonctionnera
à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur. Avant d’installer
ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est
permis de le raccorder aux installations de
l’enterprise locale de té communication. Le
matériel doit également être installé en suivant
une méthode acceptée da raccordement. L’abonné
ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la
conformité aux conditions énoncées ci-dessus
n’empêche pas la dégradation du service dans
certaines situations.
Les réparations de matériel nomologué doivent
être coordonnées par un représentant désigné par
le fournisseur. L’entreprise de té communications
peut demander à l’utilisateur da débrancher un
appareil à la suite de réparations ou de
modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à
cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit
s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à la terre de la
source d’energie électrique, de lignes
phoniques et des canalisations d’eau
métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble.
Cette précaution est particulièrement importante
dans les régions rurales.
Avertissement : L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter
de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit avoir
racours à un service d’inspection des installations
électriques, ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
AVIS : L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie
(IES) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique
le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être
raccordés à une interface. La terminaison d’une
interface té phonique peut consister en une
combinaison de quelques dispositifs, à la seule
condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de
la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.
B-1
APPENDIX B
Summary of System Commands
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
User Code
Commands Add A User Code = User Code + 8 + New User Number + New User’s Code
Change a Code = User Code + 8 + User Number + New User’s Code
Delete a User’s Code = Your User Code + 8 + User Number to Be Deleted + Your Code
Again
View User Capability = User’s Code + [] + []
Set Real-Time Clock (Installer, Master Only) = Code + [#] + 63
Programming
Commands Site Initiated Download = User Code + [#] + 1.
Direct-Wire Download Enable = User Code + [#] + 5.
Enter Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000.
Enter Interactive Program Mode = Installer Code + 8000 + [#] + 93
Exit Program Mode = 99 or 98.
Event Logging
Commands Event Log Display = Code + [#] + 60 (Installer or Master Only)
Event Log Print = Code + [#] + 61 (Installer or Master Only)
Clear Event Log = Code + [#] + 62 (Installer or Master Only)
Wireless System
Commands House ID Sniffer Mode = Code + [#] + 2 (Installer Only)
Transmitter ID Test = Code + [#] + 3 (Installer Only)
Go/No Go Test = Code + 5 (Test Key)
Partition GOTO User Code + [] + Partition Number 0-8.
GOTO Home Partition User Code + [] + 0.
Panics [] + 1 or A Key (Zone 995).
[] + [#] or B Key (Zone 999).
[#] + 3 or C Key (Zone 996).
View Downloaded Messages Press 0 for 5 Seconds.
Display All Zone Descriptors Press [] for 5 Seconds.
Additional
Commands
Display User Self Help Hold Any Key for 5 Seconds.
Output Device
Control Commands Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 71.
Activate Output Device as Programmed = User Code + [#] + 72.
Activate Output Device Manually = User Code + [#] + 70.
Activate Output Device or System Event Instantly = User Code + [#] + 77.
Randomize Output Devices = User Code + [#] + 41
Randomize Output Devices Programmed with Activation Times Between 6 PM and 5
AM = User Code + [#] + 42.
De-activate Randomization = Enter the sequence used to activate randomization.
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
B-2
Scheduling
Commands Installer-Programmed Schedule Events = Installer Code + [#] + 80 (Installer or Master
Only).
Temporary Schedule Editing = User Code + [#] + 81 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).
Extend Closing Window = User Code + [#] + 82 (Installer, Master, Manager Only).
End User Output Device Programming = User Code + [#] + 83.
Access Control
Commands Activate Access Relay for Current Partition = User Code + 0.
Request to Enter/Exit = User Code + [#] + 73.
Request to Enter/Exit at Access Point = User Code + [#] + 74 + Access Point Number.
Change Access Point State = User Code + [#] + 75 + Access Point + State.
Perform a Test of the VistaKey Module = Installer Code + [#] + 78.
Perform an Access Control Card Function = User Code + [#] + 79.
Panel Linking
Commands Only user 001 – 050 can perform panel linking.
Activate Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 86.
Exit Single-Partition, Single-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 85.
Activate Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode = User Code + [#] + 87.
Exit Multi-Partition, Multi-Panel Mode = Enter [0].
Activate Multi-Panel View Mode = User Code + [#] + 88.
Exit Multi-Panel View Mode = Enter [0].
C-1
APPENDIX C
Specifications
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP CONTROL
Physical: 14-1/2"W X 18"H X 4.3"D
Electrical:
Voltage Input: From ADEMCO No. 1361 Plug-In Transformer (use 1361CN in Canada) or 4300
transformer (for X-10 installations) rated 16.5VAC, 40 VA.
Alarm Sounder Output: 10VDC-13.8VDC, 1.7 amps max. (UL1023, UL609 installations); 750mA less aux.
current draw (UL985 installations).
Auxiliary Power Output: 9.6VDC-13.8VDC, 750mA max. For UL installations, the accessories connected to the
output must be UL Listed, and rated to operate in the above voltage range.
Backup Battery: 12VDC, 4AH or 7AH gel cell. YUASA NP4-12 (12V, 4AH) or NP7-12 (12V, 7AH)
recommended.
Standby Time: 4 hours min. with 750 mA aux. load using 7 AH battery.
Circuit Protectors: PTC circuit breakers are used on battery input to protect against reverse battery
connections and on alarm sounder output to protect against wiring faults (shorts).
A solid-state circuit breaker is used on auxiliary power output to protect against wiring
faults (shorts).
Digital Communicator
Formats Supported: ADEMCO High Speed, ADEMCO 4 + 2 Express, ADEMCO Low Speed, ADEMCO
Contact ID, Sescoa and Radionics Low Speed
Line Seize: Double Pole
Ringer Equivalence: 0.7B
FCC Registration No.: AC398U-68192-AL-E
Remote Keypads
6139
Physical:
Width: 6.25 inches
Height: 4.75 inches
Depth: 1.25 inches
Electrical:
Voltage Input: 12VDC
Current Drain: 100mA
Interface Wiring:
RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary
power
BLUE: Not Used
GREEN: Data to control panel
YELLOW: Data from control panel
BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from
supplemental power supply
6160
Physical:
Width: 7.437 inches
Height: 5.25 inches
Depth: 1.312 inches
Electrical:
Voltage Input: 12VDC
Current Drain: 150mA
Interface Wiring:
RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary
power
BLUE: Not Used
GREEN: Data to control panel
YELLOW: Data from control panel
BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from
supplemental power supply
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
C-2
D-1
APPENDIX D
Contact ID and Pager Event Codes
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES
Code Definition
110 Fire Alarm
111 Smoke Alarm
121 Duress
122 Silent Panic
123 Audible Panic
124 Duress Access Grant
125 Duress Egress Grant
131 Perimeter Burglary
132 Interior Burglary
133 24-Hour Burglary
134 Entry/Exit Burglary
135 Day/Night Burglary
140 ACS Zone Alarm
142 Polling Loop Short Alarm
150 24-Hour Auxiliary
301 AC Loss
302 Low System Battery
305 System Reset
306 Program Tamper
308 System Shutdown
309 Battery Test Fail
310 Ground Fault
313 System Engineer Reset
320 ACS Relay Supervision
321 Bell 1 Trouble
332 Poll Loop Short-Trouble
333 Expansion Module Failure
338 ACS Module Low Battery
339 ACS Module Reset
342 ACS Module AC Loss
343 ACS Module Self-Test Fail
354 ACS RS232 Fail
373 Fire Loop Trouble
378 Cross Zone Trouble
380 Trouble (global)
381 Loss of Supervision (RF)
382 Loss of RPM Supervision
383 RPM Sensor Tamper
384 RF Transmitter Low Battery
389 Detector Self-Test Failed
401 O/C by User
403 Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm
406 Cancel by User
Code Definition
407 Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)
408 Quick Arm
409 Keyswitch O/C
411 Callback Requested
421 Access Denied
422 Access Granted
423 Door Force Open
424 Egress Denied
425 Egress Granted
426 Door Prop Open
427 Access Point DSM Trouble
428 Access Point RTE Trouble
429 ACS Program Entry
430 ACS Program Exit
431 ACS Threat Change
432 Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail
433 Access Point RTE Shunt
434 Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt
441 Armed STAY
451 Early Open/Close
452 Late Open/Close
453 Fail to Open
454 Fail to Close
455 Auto-Arm Fail
457 Exit Error by User
459 Recent Close
501 ACS Reader Disable
520 ACS Relay Disable
570 Bypass
576 ACS Zone Shunt
577 ACS Point Bypass
579 Vent Zone Bypass
602 Communicator Test
606 Listen-In to Follow
607 Burglary Walk-Test
621 Event Log Reset
622 Event Log 50% Full
623 Event Log 90% Full
624 Event Log Overflow
625 Time/Date Reset
631 Exception Schedule Change
632 Access Schedule Change
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
D-2
Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors
Alpha Event Description
FIRE Fire Alarm
DURESS Duress Alarm
PANIC Silent or Audible Panic Alarm
BURGLARY Burglary Alarm
EXP SHRT Polling Loop Short
RF EXPND Expander Module Failure
AUXILIARY Non-burglary Alarm
TROUBLE Trouble
AC LOSS AC Loss
LOW BATTERY System Low Battery
SYSTEM RESET System Reset
PROG CHANGE Program Change
BATTERY FAIL System Battery Failure
RF SUPR RF Supervision
RPM SUPR RPM Supervision
RF LBAT RF Low Battery
EXP TRBL Expander Module Trouble
RF TRBL RF Trouble
TAMPER Tamper
FIRE TRB Fire Trouble
FAIL TO COMM Failure to Communicate
BELL TROUBLE Bell Trouble
DISARMED Disarmed
DISARMED-REM Disarmed Remotely
DISARMED-KEY Disarmed Via RF Key
DISARM-AUTO Auto-Disarm
CALL BACK Callback Requested
CANCEL Cancel
DISRMD-EARLY Disarmed Early
DISRMD-LATE Disarmed Late
MISSED DISRM Missed Disarm
SKED CHANGE Schedule Change
ACC SKED CHG Access Control Schedule Change
ARM FAILED Failed to Arm
DIALER SHUT Dialer Shutdown
SYSTEM SHUT System Shutdown
BYPASS Bypass
SELF TEST Self-test
TEST ENTRY Manual Test Entry
TEST EXIT Manual Test Exit
LOG 50% FULL Event Log 50% Full
LOG 90% FULL Event Log 90% Full
LOG OVERFLOW Event Log Overflow
Alpha Event Description
LOG CLEARED Event Log Cleared
TIME SET Time Set
TIME ERROR Time Error
PROGRM ENTRY Program Entry
PROGRAM EXIT Program Exit
Uxxx ADD BY User XXX Added BY
Uxxx DEL BY User XXX Deleted BY
Uxxx CHG BY User XXX Changed BY
PRINTER FAIL Event Log Printer Failure
PAGER FAILED Pager Failure
TESTED Zone Tested
UNTESTED Zone Untested
FAILED Zone Test Failed
RLY TRBL Relay Trouble
EXP TMPR Expansion Module Tamper
VENT BYPASS Vent Zone Bypass
RF JAM RF Jam Detected
JAM RSTR RF Jam Restore
FIRE RST Fire Alarm Restore
DURE RST Duress Alarm Restore
PNC RST Panic Alarm Restore
BURG RST Burglary Alarm Restore
EXP RST Expansion Module Restore
RF RST RF Restore
AUX RST Auxiliary Restore
MED RST Medical Restore
TRBL RST Trouble Restore
AC RESTORE AC Restore
LOW BATT RST System Low Battery Restore
PROG CHANGE Program Change
BAT TST FAIL Battery Test Failure
RPM RST RPM Restore
RFLB RST RF Low Battery Restore
EXP RST Expansion Module Failure Restore
TMPR RST Tamper Restore
FRTR RST Fire Trouble Restore
COMM RESTORE Communication Restore
RLY RST ECP Relay Trouble Restore
ARMED Armed
ARMED-STAY Armed Stay
ARMED-REM Armed Remotely
ARMED-QUICK Quick Armed
ARMED-KEY Armed Via RF Key
Appendix D – Contact ID and Pager Event Codes
D-3
Alpha Event Description
ARMED-AUTO Auto-Armed
PARTIAL ARM Partial Armed
ARMED-EARLY Armed Early
ARMED-LATE Armed Late
MISSED ARM Missed Arm
DIALER RST Dialer Restore (Shutdown)
SYSTEM RST System Restore (Shutdown)
BYP RST Bypass Restore
TEST EXIT Test Mode Exit
PRINTER RSTR Printer Restore
PAGER RSTR Pager Restore
BELL RESTORE Bell Restore
EXIT ERR Exit Error
RECENT ARM Recent Arm
VENT BYP RST Vent Zone Bypass Restore
Access Control Events
ACS MOD VGM/Access Control Module Failure
ACS PNT Access Point Failure
DSM SHNT Door Status Monitor Shunt
DUR ACCS Duress Access Grant
NO ENTRY Access Denied
DR OPEN Door Propped Open
DR FORCE Door Forced Open
ENTERED Access Granted
NO EXIT Egress Denied
ACPT BYP Access Point Bypass
RTE SHNT Request to Exit Shunt
EXITED Egress Granted
ACLO MOD AC Loss at Module
LBAT MOD Low Battery at Module
COMM MOD Comm Failure from MLB to Module
RES MOD Access Control Module Reset
ACPT RLY Access Point Relay Supervision Fail
SELF MOD Module Self-Test Failure
Alpha Event Description
ACZN CHG Access Control Zone Change
ACS PROG Access Control Program Entry
ACS PRGX Access Control Program Exit
THRT CHG Access Control Threat Change
SYS SHUT System Shutdown
SYS RST System Engineer Reset
ZN SHUNT Access Control Zone Shunt
ZN ALARM Access Control Zone Alarm
RDR DISA Access Control Reader Disable
RLY DISA Access Control Relay/Trigger Disable
RTE TRBL Request to Exit Point Trouble
DSM TRBL Door Status Monitor Point Trouble
DUR EXIT Duress Egress Grant
BGN ACS TEST Access Control Test Mode Start
MOD RST VGM/Access Control Module Restore
ACPT RST Access Point Restore
ACRST MOD AC Loss at Module Restore
LBAT RST Low Battery at Module Restore
COMM RST Comm Fail MLB to Module Restore
RLY RST Access Point Relay Supervision Rest
SELF RST Self-Test at Module Restore
ACPT UNB Access Point Unbypass
DSM UNSH Door Status Monitor Unshunt
RTE UNSH Request to Exit Point Unshunt
DRFO RST Door Forced Open Restore
DRPO RST Door Propped Open Restore
DSM RST Door Status Monitor Trouble Restore
RTE RST Request to Exit Point Trouble Rest
RLY ENAB Access Control Relay/Trigger Enable
RDR ENAB Access Control Reader Enable
ZNAL RST Access Control Zone Restore
ZN UNSHT Access Control Zone Unshunt
SYSHTRST System Shutdown Restore
END ACS TEST Access Control Test Mode End
VISTA-128BP/VISTA-250BP Installation and Setup Guide
D-4
Index-1
Index
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
#93 Menu Mode Programming.....................................4-2
#93 Menu Mode Programming Commands .................4-4
12/24 Hour Type Stamp Format.................................5-11
1361 ...................................................................3-28, C-1
24-hour Audible Alarm Type 07....................................4-7
24-hour Auxiliary Alarm Type 08..................................4-7
24-hour Silent Alarm Type 06.......................................4-6
2-Wire Latching Glassbreak Detectors ........................3-8
2-Wire Smoke Detectors..............................................3-6
333 PRM ......................................................................3-7
4100SM Serial Module .................................................7-4
4101SN Relay Modules..............................................3-15
4197 Polling Loop Extender.......................................3-10
4204 and 4204CF Relay Modules..............................3-14
4285/4286 VIP Module...............................................3-24
4297 Polling Loop Extender.......................................3-10
4300 transformer........................................................3-28
4300 Transformer............................................. 3-15, 3-28
4-Wire Smoke Detectors..............................................3-6
5800 Series Transmitters...........................................3-12
5800TM Module .........................................................3-12
5869 ................................................................... 1-2, 3-10
5881ENHC ......................................................... 1-2, 3-10
6139 ............................................................................C-1
675 Ground Start Module...........................................3-15
719 ...............................................................................3-4
747 ...............................................................................3-4
7720 ...........................................................................3-17
7720ULF ....................................................................3-17
7920SE ......................................................................3-17
A
AAV ............................................................................3-25
ABB1031 ......................................................................3-4
AC 60Hz or 50Hz .......................................................5-11
AC Loss Keypad Sounding ..........................................5-2
AC Outlet Ground.......................................................3-29
Access Group..............................................................9-3
Access Control.......................................... 3-22, 3-23, 4-9
Access Control Commands..................................6-8, B-2
Access Control Dialer Enables...................................5-10
Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point...........................4-9
Access Control of Lighting and Appliances................4-10
Access Control Using RF Transmitter........................4-10
ACCESS GRP PGM.....................................................4-3
ACCESS POINT PGM..................................................4-3
Access Point Type 27...................................................4-7
Access Relay Number................................................5-12
Access Schedules........................................................6-5
Action Code..................................................................6-8
Action Specifier ............................................................6-8
Activation Time.............................................................6-9
Adding a User Code.....................................................9-3
Adding an RF Key to a User Code...............................9-4
Addressing the Keypads ..............................................3-3
ADEMCO 4+2 Express.................................................3-5
ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS............................................ C-1
ADEMCO 4146...........................................................3-16
ADEMCO 685 receiver.................................................3-5
ADEMCO 685 Receiver .............................................3-25
Ademco AB12. .............................................................3-1
ADEMCO Contact ID....................................................3-5
ADEMCO CONTACT ID.............................................. C-1
ADEMCO HIGH SPEED.............................................. C-1
ADEMCO Low Speed...................................................3-5
ADEMCO LOW SPEED .............................................. C-1
Affects Lobby ........................................................2-2, 5-7
Agency Statements..................................................... A-1
Alarm Output Current Load........................................3-30
Alarm Output Supervision ............................................3-4
Allow Disarm Outside Window if Alarm Occurs .........5-13
Allow Disarming Only During Arm/Disarm Windows..5-13
Alpha Pager Module............................................3-20, 4-9
ALPHA PROG..............................................................4-3
Antenna Fault.............................................................3-20
Arm/Disarm Commands...............................................6-8
Arm-Away Type 21.......................................................4-7
Arms Lobby...........................................................2-2, 5-7
Arm-STAY Type 20 ......................................................4-7
Audio Alarm Verification Module................................3-25
Auto Arming .................................................................6-1
Auto Disarming.............................................................6-1
Auto-Arm Delay...................................................5-12, 6-1
Auto-Arm Warning .......................................................6-1
Auto-Arm Warning Period ..........................................5-12
Auto-Disarm Delay.....................................................5-12
AUXILIARY OUTPUT ENABLE.........................3-15, 3-17
Auxiliary Output Mode................................................5-10
Auxiliary Power Current Load.....................................3-29
B
BACK-UP BATTERY................................................... C-1
Battery Capacity Worksheet ......................................3-30
Battery Selection Table..............................................3-31
Battery Test................................................................10-1
Bell Timeout .................................................................5-2
Burglary Alarm Communicator Delay...........................5-7
Burglary or RS232 Input...............................................5-2
Burglary Trigger for Response Type 8 .........................5-3
Burglary Walk Test.....................................................10-1
Button RF...................................................................3-13
Button RF (BR) Type 05...............................................4-8
Bypass Commands......................................................6-8
C
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) ......................... A-2
Call Waiting Defeat ....................................................5-10
Callback .......................................................................7-3
Callback Requested.....................................................7-1
CANADIAN EMISSIONS STATEMENTS.................... A-4
Cancel Verify................................................................5-7
Changing a User Code.................................................9-4
Check Messages........................................................10-3
Check or TBLE Display................................................5-7
Checksum Verification .................................................5-5
Chime on External Siren ............................................5-10
Index
Index-2
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS ............................................ C-1
Code + TEST [5].........................................................10-1
Cold Water Pipe.........................................................3-29
COMM FAILURE........................................................10-3
Common Lobby............................................................2-1
Communication Defaults..............................................4-5
Communicator Split Reporting Selection ...................5-10
Compass Downloading Software .................................7-4
COMPASS downloading software................................7-1
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors...........................3-6
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors................... 3-6, 3-7
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters........................3-13
Compatible Alarm Indicating Devices ..........................3-4
Compatible Glass Break Detectors ..............................3-8
Compatible Polling Loop Devices ................................3-9
Confirmation of Arming Ding ........................................5-2
Console Input (CS) Type 09.........................................4-8
Contact ID ....................................................................1-3
CONTACT ID EVENT CODES....................................D-1
Contacting Technical Support....................................10-4
Control Unit Power Supply Load ................................3-29
Conventions Used in This Manual.................................. vi
Cross Zoning Pair Four ................................................5-9
Cross Zoning Pair One.................................................5-9
Cross Zoning Pair Three ..............................................5-9
Cross Zoning Pair Two.................................................5-9
Cross-Zoning................................................................5-8
CUSTOM INDEX ..........................................................4-3
D
Data Encryption............................................................7-1
Data Field Descriptions................................................5-1
Data Field Programming Mode ....................................4-1
Daylight Saving Time Start/End Month.......................5-12
Daylight Saving Time Start/End Weekend .................5-12
Deleting a User Code...................................................9-4
DEVICE PROG ............................................................4-3
Dial Tone Detection......................................................5-5
Dial Tone Pause...........................................................5-5
Dialer Test..................................................................10-1
DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR........................................C-1
DIP Switch Loop (DP) Type 07.....................................4-8
Direct-Wire Downloading .............................................7-4
Disable Download Callback........................................5-11
Disarm Delay................................................................6-1
Disarm Type 22............................................................4-7
Display Burglary & Panic Alarms for Other Partitions 5-13
Display Fire Alarms of Other Partitions ......................5-13
Display Troubles of Other Partitions...........................5-13
Door Status Monitor (DSM) Type 11 ............................4-8
Download Command Enables......................................5-4
Download ID Number...................................................5-4
Download Phone Number ............................................5-4
Downloading.................................................................7-1
Downloading Access Security......................................7-1
Downloading Requirements .........................................7-1
Dual Reporting .............................................................5-5
Duress Codes Level 6..................................................9-2
Duress Reporting .........................................................9-2
Dynamic Signaling Delay ................................... 3-19, 5-6
Dynamic Signaling Priority ................................. 3-19, 5-6
E
Early Power Detect ....................................................3-20
Earth Ground..............................................................3-29
ECP Wire Run............................................................3-17
Enable 5800 RF Button Force Arm............................5-11
Enable 5800 RF Button Global Arm...........................5-11
Enable Dialer Reports for Panics & Duress .................5-7
Enable GOTO for this Partition ..................................5-13
Enable J7 Triggers for Partition..................................5-13
Enable Open/Close Report for Installer Code..............5-4
Enable Open/Close report for Keyswitch .....................5-4
Enable Random Timers For Partitions 1-8...................5-1
Entering Programming Mode .......................................4-1
Entry Delay #1..............................................................5-1
Entry Delay #2..............................................................5-2
Entry Warning ..............................................................5-7
Entry/Exit #1 Type 01...................................................4-6
Entry/Exit #2 Type 02...................................................4-6
Event Log..........................................................3-23, 4-10
Event Log and Pager Alpha Descriptors..................... D-2
Event Log Printer On-Line Mode................................5-11
Event Log Types ........................................................5-11
Event Logging Commands.......................................... B-1
EVENT/ACTION PGM...........................................4-3, 4-4
Exception Reports........................................................6-2
Exit Delay #1................................................................5-2
Exit Delay #2................................................................5-2
Exit Delay Sounding...................................................5-10
Exit Error ......................................................................1-2
Exit Error Logic Enable ................................................5-8
Exiting the User Edit Mode...........................................9-4
EXPERT MODE ...........................................................4-3
Extend Closing Window...............................................6-1
External Sounders........................................................3-4
F
FCC Part 15 STATEMENT.......................................... A-3
FCC PART 68 NOTICE............................................... A-3
FCC REGISTRATION NO........................................... C-1
Fire Display Lock..........................................................5-7
Fire With Verification Type 16......................................4-7
First Communication ....................................................7-3
First Test Report Time .................................................5-6
Force Arm ....................................................................6-1
Force Arm Enable for Auto-Arm.................................5-12
Frwd. Power Loss ......................................................3-20
FSA Modules..............................................................3-14
G
General Description .....................................................1-1
General Purpose (GP) Type 13....................................4-8
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel...........................7-3
Global Arm ? ................................................................9-3
Go/No Go Test Mode .................................................10-2
Grade A Mercantile Premises Listing...........................3-1
Grade A Mercantile Safe and Vault Listing ..................3-2
Grade A Service...................................................A-1, A-2
Grade AA Service ................................................A-1, A-2
Ground Start Module..................................................3-15
Index
Index-3
H
Hardwire and Optional Expansion Zones.....................1-1
Hardwired (HW) Type 01..............................................4-7
Holiday Schedule Programming...................................6-7
Holiday Schedules ........................................ 6-3, 6-4, 6-6
House ID Sniffer Mode...............................................3-12
How to Use Panel Linking ........................................... B-2
I
Ignore Expansion Zone Tamper...................................5-3
Installer (User 1) Code Level 0............................. 5-1, 9-1
Installer Unattended Program Mode ............................7-2
Installing RPM Devices ................................................3-9
Installing The Control ...................................................3-1
Installing the Control's Circuit Board ............................3-2
Intelligent Test Report..................................................5-3
Interior w/Delay Type 10 ..............................................4-7
Interior, Follower Type 04.............................................4-6
K
Keypad Panic Enables .................................................5-3
Keypads .......................................................................2-1
Keyswitch...................................................................3-16
Keyswitch Assignment .................................................5-2
Keyswitch Tamper......................................................3-16
L
Limitation of Access .....................................................6-2
Limitation of Access Schedules .................................6-11
Limitation Of Access Schedules Programming..........6-12
LINE SEIZE.................................................................C-1
List of Figures..................................................................v
LO BAT.......................................................................10-3
Lobby Partition .............................................................5-7
Long Range Radio Central Station #1 Category
Enable ......................................................................5-6
Long Range Radio Central Station #2 Category
Enable ......................................................................5-6
Long Range Radio ECP.............................................4-10
Long Range Radio to ECP.........................................3-19
Long Range Radio to J7 Triggers ..............................3-17
Low Speed Format (Primary) .......................................5-5
Low Speed Format (Secondary) ..................................5-5
LRR Battery................................................................3-20
LRR CRC is bad.........................................................3-20
LRR reporting options ................................................3-19
LRR Trouble Messages..............................................3-20
M
Main Logic Board .......................................................3-23
Main Logic Board Supervision Type 28........................4-7
Manager Codes Level 2 ...............................................9-1
Master Codes Level 1 ..................................................9-1
Master Keypad .............................................................2-3
MODEM COMM.................................................. 7-1, 10-3
Modems........................................................................7-1
Momentary Exit Type 29...............................................4-7
Mounting The Control Cabinet .....................................3-1
Multi-Access ?..............................................................9-3
Multi-Panel View Mode.................................................2-7
Multi-Partition Multi-Panel Mode ..................................2-6
Multiple Alarms.............................................................5-3
Multiple Partition Access..............................................9-2
N
No Alarm Response Type 23.......................................4-7
Non-UL Installations.....................................................3-4
Normally Closed or EOLR (Zones 2-8) ........................5-4
Number of Partitions ..................................................5-12
O
OC or OPEN CIRCUIT.................................................3-3
On-Line Control Functions ...........................................7-3
Open/Close Reporting..................................................9-2
Open/Close Reports by Exception ......................5-13, 6-3
Open/Close Schedule Programming............................6-6
Open/Close Schedules ................................. 6-3, 6-4, 6-6
Open/Close Windows ..................................................6-8
Operator Access Levels...............................................7-1
Operator Codes Levels 3-5..........................................9-1
Output Device Control Commands ............................. B-1
Output Devices...........................................................3-14
OUTPUT PGM .............................................................4-3
Overvoltage Protection.................................................3-5
P
PA400 ..........................................................................3-4
PABX Access Code .....................................................5-3
Pager 1 Delay 1 .........................................................5-14
Pager 1 Delay 2 .........................................................5-14
Pager 1 Format ..........................................................5-14
Pager 1 ID Number ....................................................5-14
Pager 1 Partition Enable ............................................5-14
Pager 1 Phone Number .............................................5-14
Pager 1 Trigger Event Enables.........................5-14, 5-17
Pager 2 Delay 1 .........................................................5-14
Pager 2 Delay 2 .........................................................5-14
Pager 2 Format ..........................................................5-14
Pager 2 ID Number ....................................................5-14
Pager 2 Partition Enable ............................................5-15
Pager 2 Phone Number .............................................5-14
Pager 2 Trigger Event Enables..................................5-15
Pager 3 Delay 1 .........................................................5-15
Pager 3 Delay 2 .........................................................5-15
Pager 3 Format ..........................................................5-15
Pager 3 ID Number ....................................................5-15
Pager 3 Partition Enable ............................................5-15
Pager 3 Phone Number .............................................5-15
Pager 3 Trigger Event Enables..................................5-15
Pager 4 Delay 1 .........................................................5-15
Pager 4 Delay 2 .........................................................5-15
Pager 4 Format ..........................................................5-15
Pager 4 ID Number ....................................................5-15
Pager 4 Partition Enable ............................................5-15
Pager 4 Phone Number .............................................5-15
Pager 4 Trigger Event Enables..................................5-16
Pager 5 Delay 1 .........................................................5-16
Pager 5 Delay 2 .........................................................5-16
Index
Index-4
Pager 5 Format ..........................................................5-16
Pager 5 ID Number ....................................................5-16
Pager 5 Partition Enable ............................................5-16
Pager 5 Phone Number..............................................5-16
Pager 5 Trigger Event Enables ..................................5-16
Pager 6 Delay 1..........................................................5-16
Pager 6 Delay 2..........................................................5-16
Pager 6 Format ..........................................................5-16
Pager 6 ID Number ....................................................5-16
Pager 6 Partition Enable ............................................5-16
Pager 6 Phone Number..............................................5-16
Pager 6 Trigger Event Enables ..................................5-16
Pager 7 Delay 1..........................................................5-17
Pager 7 Delay 2..........................................................5-17
Pager 7 Format ..........................................................5-17
Pager 7 ID Number ....................................................5-17
Pager 7 Partition Enable ............................................5-17
Pager 7 Phone Number..............................................5-17
Pager 7 Trigger Event Enables ..................................5-17
Pager 8 Delay 1..........................................................5-17
Pager 8 Delay 2..........................................................5-17
Pager 8 Format ..........................................................5-17
Pager 8 ID Number ....................................................5-17
Pager 8 Partition Enable ............................................5-17
Pager 8 Phone Number..............................................5-17
Pager Format .............................................................3-20
Pager Installed ...........................................................5-14
Paging Service...........................................................3-20
Panel Link Module Supervision....................................2-5
Panel Linking........................................................ 2-4, 4-8
Panel Linking Commands ........................................... B-2
Panel Linking Users ............................................. 2-5, 9-1
Panic Button or Speedkey............................................5-9
Partitioned System .......................................................2-1
PassPoint Access Control (ACS) Type 10 ...................4-8
PassPoint Access Control System.............................3-23
PassPoint Dialer Events...............................................4-9
Perimeter Type 03........................................................4-6
Peripherals Devices .....................................................1-2
Permanent Keypad Display Backlighting ...................5-10
Phone Module Access Code........................................5-2
PLL out of Lock ..........................................................3-20
PLM..............................................................................2-4
Polling Loop .................................................................3-9
Polling Loop Current Draw .........................................3-29
Polling Loop Supervision............................................3-10
Power Failure .............................................................10-3
Power Unattained.......................................................3-20
Powerline Carrier devices ..........................................3-15
Power-Up in Previous State .........................................5-3
Prevent Fire Timeout....................................................5-2
Prevent Zone XXX Bypass...........................................5-4
Primary Format.............................................................5-5
Primary Phone Number................................................5-4
Primary Subscriber’s Account Number ........................5-4
Printer Baud Rate.......................................................5-11
Printer Configurations ................................................3-23
Printer Type................................................................5-11
Priority of Displays for Panel Linking............................2-7
Program Modes............................................................4-1
Programming Commands ....................................4-1, B-1
Programming Entry Errors............................................4-2
Programming Overview................................................4-1
Programming Partition-Specific Data Fields ................4-2
Programming Scheduling Options ...............................6-4
Programming System-Wide Data Fields......................4-2
Q
Quick Arm .............................................................5-3, 9-1
Quick Exit.....................................................................5-1
R
RADIONICS LOW SPEED.......................................... C-1
Random time................................................................6-9
Randomize AC Loss Report.........................................5-2
RCVR SETUP ERROR ..............................................10-3
Real-Time Clock...........................................................8-1
Recent Close................................................................1-2
Refresh Feature ...........................................................6-7
Regulatory Agency Statements................................... A-1
Relay commands .........................................................6-8
Relay Timeout XXX Minutes ......................................5-12
Relay Timeout YYY Seconds.....................................5-12
Remote Keypad Sounder...........................................3-17
REPORT CODE PROG................................................4-3
Reporting Formats .......................................................3-5
Request to Exit (RTE) Type 12 ....................................4-8
Restore Report Timing.................................................5-7
Restrict Disarming........................................................6-1
RF Motion (RM) Type 02.....................................3-13, 4-7
RF Receiver Supervision Check-in Interval .................5-9
RF System Installation Advisories..............................3-11
RF System Operation and Supervision......................3-10
RF Transmitter Check-in Interval .................................5-9
RF Transmitter Low Battery Reporting.........................5-9
RF Transmitter Low Battery Sound..............................5-9
Ring Count ...................................................................7-3
Ring Detection Count...................................................5-5
RINGER EQUIVALENCE............................................ C-1
RJ31X Jack.........................................................3-5, 3-25
RLY VOICE DESCR.....................................................4-3
RS-485 Bus.........................................................2-4, 3-17
RTE..............................................................................4-8
S
Scheduled Check-in.....................................................7-4
Scheduled Download ...................................................7-4
Scheduling ...................................................................6-1
Scheduling Commands............................................... B-2
Scheduling Menu Mode ...............................................6-4
Secondary Format........................................................5-5
Secondary Phone Number...........................................5-4
Secondary Subscriber Account Number......................5-7
Send Cancel If Alarm + Off ........................................5-11
Send Message to Pager After Dialer..........................5-14
Serial Number Devices ................................................3-9
Serial Number Polling Loop (DS) Type 08...................4-8
Serial Number Polling Loop (SL) Type 06....................4-8
SESCOA ..................................................................... C-1
Sescoa/Radionics Select ......................................3-5, 5-5
Single-Partition Single-Panel Mode .............................2-5
Siren Driver ..................................................................3-5
Smoke Detector Reset...............................................3-17
Specifications.............................................................. C-1
Standard/Expanded Reporting Primary........................5-6
Standard/Expanded Reporting Secondary...................5-6
Standby Battery Size..................................................3-30
Supervised Fire (Without Verification) Type 09 ...........4-7
Index
Index-5
Supervised RF............................................................3-13
Supervised RF (RF) Type 03 .......................................4-8
Supervision Pulses for LRR .......................................5-13
Supplementary Power Supply......................................3-3
Suppress Transmitter Supervision Sound..................5-11
Swinger Suppression ...................................................5-6
System Commands..................................................... B-1
System Communication ...............................................1-3
System Events Notify ...................................................5-1
SYSTEM LO BAT............................................. 10-1, 10-3
System Messages......................................................10-3
System Sensor A77-716B EOL Relay Module.............3-7
System Sensor MA 12/24D..........................................3-4
System Sensor P12575................................................3-4
T
Tamper Supervision.....................................................3-8
TAP protocol...............................................................3-20
Telephone Line Connections .......................................3-5
TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS................ A-3
TeleSmart.................................................... 1-1, 3-26, 4-9
Temporary Schedules ........................................ 6-3, 6-12
Temporary Schedules Programming..........................6-13
Test Report Interval......................................................5-3
Testing The System ...................................................10-1
Time Driven Events......................................................6-2
Time Driven Events Worksheet....................................6-7
Time to Delay Pager After Dialer................................5-14
Time Windows............................................... 6-2, 6-4, 6-5
Time Windows Programming.......................................6-5
Timed Events ...............................................................6-5
Time-Driven Events......................................................6-7
Time-Driven Events Programming ....................... 6-7, 6-9
TouchTone or Rotary Dial ............................................5-3
TouchTone with Rotary Backup .................................5-10
Transformer Connections...........................................3-28
Transmitter Battery Life..............................................3-13
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode .......................................10-2
Transmitter Input Types .............................................3-13
Transmitter Supervision .............................................3-13
Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night Type 05.......................4-6
Trouble Conditions.....................................................10-3
Trouble Messages......................................................10-3
Turning the System Over to the User.........................10-3
U
UL Installation Requirements...................................... A-1
UL Listed Applications................................................3-15
UL1023 Household Burglary Installations....................3-4
UL365 Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm ......... A-1
UL609 Grade A Local Mercantile Premises/Local
Mercantile Safe & Vault........................................... A-1
UL611/UL1610 Central Station Burglary Alarm........... A-2
UL985 Household Fire or Household Fire/Burglary
Installations ..............................................................3-4
UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION .......................2-2
Unattended Download..................................................7-1
Unattended Mode.........................................................5-6
Unsupervised RF........................................................3-13
Unsupervised RF (UR) Type 04 ...................................4-8
Use Partition Descriptor .............................................5-13
User Access Codes......................................................9-1
User Code Authority Levels .........................................9-1
User Code Commands................................................ B-1
User Code Defaults......................................................9-1
User Code Rules..........................................................9-2
User Scheduling Menu Mode.....................................6-14
Users............................................................................2-1
Using ACS Zone Inputs................................................4-9
V
VA8200 ...............................................................2-4, 3-17
VA8201 ......................................................................3-20
View Capabilities..........................................................9-1
VIP Module.................................................................3-24
VIP Module Phone Code..............................................5-2
VISTA Gateway Module......................................3-23, 4-9
VISTA-128B Plus as Stand-Alone Access Control ....4-10
VISTA-128B PLUS Current Load...............................3-30
VistaKey..............................................................3-22, 4-9
VistaKey Dialer Enables...............................................4-9
W
Wheelock AS-121575W..............................................3-4
Wire Run Length........................................................3-17
Wire Run Length/Gauge ..............................................3-3
Wireless Keypad Assignment ....................................5-10
Wireless Keypad Tamper Detect ...............................5-10
Wireless System Commands...................................... B-1
Wireless Zone Expansion ..........................................3-10
Wiring Devices to Zones 1-9........................................3-6
Wiring the Alarm Output...............................................3-4
Wiring the Keypads......................................................3-3
Worksheets to calculate the total current...................3-29
World Wide Web Address .........................................10-4
X
X-10............................................................................3-15
Y
Yuasa.........................................................................3-31
Z
Zone 5 Audio Alarm Verification.................................5-11
Zone 804....................................................................3-24
Zone Defaults...............................................................4-4
Zone Index ...................................................................4-4
Zone Input Type Definitions .........................................4-7
Zone Number Designations .........................................4-4
ZONE PROG........................................................... vi, 4-3
Zone Response Type Definitions.................................4-6
Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 1-8 .....................5-6
Zone Type Restores for Zone Types 9, 10 and 16.......5-6
Zones ...........................................................................2-1
E-1
APPENDIX E
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
WARNING!
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or
other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a vari-
ety of reasons. For example:
Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or
disconnect an alarm warning device.
Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work with-
out power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in
properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.
Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if
the signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.
A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths in the United States, they may not acti-
vate or provide early warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires, according to data published by the
Federal Emergency Management Agency. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction with this System may
not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned. Smoke detectors may not
sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side
of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or building. A second floor de-
tector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have sensing limitations. No
smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn about fires caused by
carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable
materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the nature of the fire
and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide sufficient warning
to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.
Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their
installation manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams
of protection, and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion
or intrusion that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows.
Mechanical tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical
system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the
ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 90° to 105°F (32° to 40°C), the detection
performance can decrease.
Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the
other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bed-
rooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear
the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic.
Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.
Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect them-
selves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.
This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to
last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This
alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security keypad
(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.
Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.
Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device
being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all
reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,
thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.
Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute
for insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and
continue to insure their lives and property. We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm
systems owe it to themselves and their loved ones to learn about these developments.
E-2
ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries and
affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in conformance
with its own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under
normal use and service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or, for products not having
an ADEMCO date stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or
catalog sets forth a shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's obligation shall be
limited to repairing or replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any product which is
proved not in compliance with Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under
normal use and service. Seller shall have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the
product is altered or improperly repaired or serviced by anyone other than ADEMCO factory service. For
warranty service, return product transportation prepaid, to ADEMCO Factory Service, 170 Michael Drive,
Syosset, New York 11791.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE
FACE HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OR UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR
DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.
Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the
products will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the
products will in all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly
installed and maintained alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire or other events
occurring without providing an alarm, but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that
there will be no personal injury or property loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A
CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING. HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE,
WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM
LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, WHICH
SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This warranty replaces any
previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase or alteration,
written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.
E-3
VISTA-128BP Summary of Connections Diagram
ASSEMBLED
IN MEXICO
++
-
N.C. N.C.
N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1) 2k EOLR
(note 1)
+-
+-
+-
BELL
SIREN
NO CONNECTION
TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
(IN CANADA
USE No. 1361CN)
or 4300 IF
X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED
Connect to
24hr. 120VAC,
60 Hz Outlet Red Blk Grn Yel
REMOTE KEYPAD
Use 6137/6128
or 6139
(Addressable keypads) only
++
-
N.C. N.C.
2k EOLR
(note 1) 2k EOLR
(note 1)
++
-
N.C.
++
-
N.C. N.C.
2k EOLR
(note 1,4)
(note 6)
TIP
(BROWN)
RING
(GRAY)
TIP
(GREEN)
RING
(RED)
Handset Incoming
Phone Line
Telephone connections
using Ademco No. 620
RJ31X direct connect
cord.
EARTH GROUND
Connect to good earth
ground to maintain im-
munity to transients.
See Instructions for
proper grounding.
SMOKE
4208U
RPM
4191SN
PIR
Polling loop rating: 128mA max.
See
Installation and Setup Guide
for
maximum number of devices supported
and maximum wire run length
VISTA-128BP
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS
Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM
ZONE 1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP
(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)
POLLING LOOP
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
Data in
Data out
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617181920 21222324252627 28 29 30
RED (+)BLK (-)
Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH
GEL CELL
BATTERY
CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7VDC
See
Installation
and Set up Guide
for required
capacity
Replace
every
3 years
NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.
See Installation Instructions
for max # of keypads
and for max wire run length.
ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8VDC
AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT
9.6VDC - 13.8VDC,
750mA maximum
Note: Include current drawn
by keypads and polling loop
devices when making
auxiliary power calculations.
+-
NOTES:
1. Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised
or normally closed (no EOLR) operation via
cut jumper. (Cut red jumper for normally closed
operation. Do not cut for Fire Usage). Zones 2-8
may be selected for either operation via program
field *41.
Zone 1 supports 2-wire smoke detectors.
See Installation and Setup Guide for recommended
type and maximum number of detectors supported.
2.
Zone 7 may be used for remote keyswitch
arming/disarming. See Installation and Setup Guide
for wiring instructions.
3.
Zone 8 supports 2-wire latching type glass break detectors.
See Installation and Setup Guide for recommended type
and maximum number of detectors supported.
Cut blue jumper to disable supervision of alarm sounder output.
Leave jumper intact to supervise output. (See
Installation and
Setup Guide
for Programming and Wiring Instructions).
Zone 9 may be used for RS232 input.
4.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Not Used
2. Ground-
3. Out 1 (Ground Start)
4. Ground-
5. Out 2 (fire)
6. Ground-
7. Out 3 (burg/aud. panic)
8. Ground
9. Out 4 (silent panic/
duress)
Optional programming:
Out 1: Smoke Detector Reset
Out 2: Armed LED
Out 4: Ready LED
Ratings for Out 1:
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 4k OHMS
Not Active: 100 OHMS to ground
Ratings for out 2-4:
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 5k OHMS
Not Active: 1k OHMS to ground
N.C.
N.O.
N.O. N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1,2)
N.O. N.O. N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1) 2k EOLR
(note 1,3)
N.C.
+-
J7
GLASS
BREAK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8
MAKE CONNECTIONS USING
No. 4142TR CABLE
WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED
Fire
Usage
Burg.
Usage
CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL
TO A FIRE ALARM HEADQUARTERS OR A
CENTRAL STATION SHALL BE PERMITED
ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE
BURGLAR ALARM SIGNAL SHALL NOT BE
CONNECTED TO A POLICE EMERGENCY
NUMBER.
1. In 2 (Printer DTR)
2. Ground
3. In 3 (4300 sync)
4. In 4 (4300 sync)
5. Ground
6. Out 5 (4300 data)
7. Out 6 (Printer RXD)
8. Ground
9. Ground
Red Jumper
(note 1)
DOC LOAD NO.: 5
J7 Header J8 Header
BATTERY
TABS
4192SD
SMOKE
WARNING: TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, DISCONNECT
TELCO JACK BEFORE
SERVICING THIS PANEL.
THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL
FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S
STANDARD 72 (NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOC., BATTERYMARCH
PARK. QUINCY, MA. 02269). PRINTED
INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, TESTING,
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING
AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE
PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.
WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.
Zone response time:
ZONES 1: 350mSec-500mSec
COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC398U-68192-AL-E
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.7B
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF
FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE
MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE
RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
(Refer to
Installation and Setup Guide
for information concerning Direct Wire
Downloading and printer connections.)
Notes For UL Household
Fire Installations
1. Use 12VDC, 14AH battery
2. Maximum auxiliary current,
including polling loop 300mA
3. Combined alarm and auxilary power output
and polling loop current must be limited to 750mA
for UL985 Household Fire Installations.
ALL CIRCUITS ARE
POWER LIMITED.
Blue
Jumper
(note 5)
5.
6.
V128BP-SOC-V0
E-4
VISTA-250BP Summary of Connections Diagram
ASSEMBLED
IN MEXICO
++
-
N.C. N.C.
N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1) 2k EOLR
(note 1)
+-
+-
+-
BELL
SIREN
NO CONNECTION
TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
(IN CANADA
USE No. 1361CN)
or 4300 IF
X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED
Connect to
24hr. 120VAC,
60 Hz Outlet Red Blk Grn Yel
REMOTE KEYPAD
Use 6137/6128
or 6139
(Addressable keypads) only
++
-
N.C. N.C.
2k EOLR
(note 1) 2k EOLR
(note 1)
++
-
N.C.
++
-
N.C. N.C.
2k EOLR
(note 1,4)
(note 6)
TIP
(BROWN)
RING
(GRAY)
TIP
(GREEN)
RING
(RED)
Handset Incoming
Phone Line
Telephone connections
using Ademco No. 620
RJ31X direct connect
cord.
EARTH GROUND
Connect to good earth
ground to maintain im-
munity to transients.
See Instructions for
proper grounding.
SMOKE
4208U
RPM
4191SN
PIR
Polling loop rating: 128mA max.
See
Installation and Setup Guide
for
maximum number of devices supported
and maximum wire run length
VISTA-250BP
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS
USE UL LISTED ENERGY CABLE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS
Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM
ZONE 1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9
2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP
(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)
POLLING LOOP
LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP
Data in
Data out
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617181920 21222324252627 28 29 30
RED (+)BLK (-)
Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH
GEL CELL
BATTERY
CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7VDC
See
Installation
and Setup Guide
for required
capacity
Replace
every
3 years
NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.
See Installation Instructions
for max # of keypads
and for max wire run length.
ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8VDC
AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT
9.6VDC - 13.8VDC,
750mA maximum
Note: Include current drawn
by keypads and polling loop
devices when making
auxiliary power calculations.
+-
NOTES:
1. Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised
or normally closed (no EOLR) operation via
cut jumper. (Cut red jumper for normally closed
operation. Do not cut for Fire Usage). Zones 2-8
may be selected for either operation via program
field *41.
Zone 1 supports 2-wire smoke detectors.
See Installation and Setup Guide for recommended
type and maximum number of detectors supported.
2.
Zone 7 may be used for remote keyswitch
arming/disarming. See Installation and Setup Guide
for wiring instructions.
3.
Zone 8 supports 2-wire latching type glass break detectors.
See Installation and Setup Guide for recommended type
and maximum number of detectors supported.
Cut blue jumper to disable supervision of alarm sounder output.
Leave jumper intact to supervise output. (See
Installation and
Setup Guide
for Programming and Wiring Instructions).
Zone 9 may be used for RS232 input.
4.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Not Used
2. Ground-
3. Out 1 (Ground Start)
4. Ground-
5. Out 2 (fire)
6. Ground-
7. Out 3 (burg/aud. panic)
8. Ground
9. Out 4 (silent panic/
duress)
Optional programming:
Out 1: Smoke Detector Reset
Out 2: Armed LED
Out 4: Ready LED
Ratings for Out 1:
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 4k OHMS
Not Active: 100 OHMS to ground
Ratings for out 2-4:
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 5k OHMS
Not Active: 1k OHMS to ground
N.C.
N.O.
N.O. N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1,2)
N.O. N.O. N.O.
N.C.
N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1)
2k EOLR
(note 1,3)
N.C.
+-
J7
GLASS
BREAK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J8
MAKE CONNECTIONS USING
No. 4142TR CABLE
WARNING: OWNER'S INSTRUCTION NOTICE NOT TO BE REMOVED
Fire
Usage
Burg.
Usage
CONNECTION OF THE FIRE ALARM SIGNAL
TO A FIRE ALARM HEADQUARTERS OR A
CENTRAL STATION SHALL BE PERMITED
ONLY WITH THE APPROVAL OF THE LOCAL
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. THE
BURGLAR ALARM SIGNAL SHALL NOT BE
CONNECTED TO A POLICE EMERGENCY
NUMBER.
1. In 2 (Printer DTR)
2. Ground
3. In 3 (4300 sync)
4. In 4 (4300 sync)
5. Ground
6. Out 5 (4300 data)
7. Out 6 (Printer RXD)
8. Ground
9. Ground
Red Jumper
(note 1)
DOC LOAD NO.: 5
J7 Header J8 Header
BATTERY
TABS
4192SD
SMOKE
WARNING: TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, DISCONNECT
TELCO JACK BEFORE
SERVICING THIS PANEL.
THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE INSTALLED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL
FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION'S
STANDARD 72 (NATIONAL FIRE
PROTECTION ASSOC., BATTERYMARCH
PARK. QUINCY, MA. 02269). PRINTED
INFORMATION DESCRIBING PROPER
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, TESTING,
MAINTENANCE, EVACUATION PLANNING
AND REPAIR SERVICE IS TO BE
PROVIDED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.
WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.
Zone response time:
ZONES 1: 350mSec-500mSec
COMPLIES WITH FCC RULES, PART 68
FCC REGISTRATION NO. AC398U-68192-AL-E
RINGER EQUIVALENCE: 0.7B
THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF
FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE
FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE
MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND
(2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE
RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE
THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION.
(Refer to
Installation and Setup Guide
for information concerning Direct Wire
Downloading and printer connections.)
Notes For UL Household
Fire Installations
1. Use 12VDC, 14AH battery
2. Maximum auxiliary current,
including polling loop 300mA
3. Combined alarm and auxilary power output
and polling loop current must be limited to 750mA
for UL985 Household Fire Installations.
ALL CIRCUITS ARE
POWER LIMITED.
Blue
Jumper
(note 5)
5.
6.
V250BP-SOC-V0
¬.4l
K5894 2/02 Rev B
165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791
Copyright © 2002 PITTWAY CORPORATION

Navigation menu